PCS-915IC X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.13-Đã M Khóa

PCS-915IC
Centralized Busbar Relay

Instruction Manual
NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface
Preface
1.1 Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.
Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
1.2 Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.
Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.
Qualified personnel are individuals who:
 Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;
 Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;
 Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;
 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
1.3 Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay i

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.
CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.
NOTICE! is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
WARNING!
Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.
WARNING!
Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
 Earthing
Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.
 Operating environment
ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.
ii PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
 Ratings
Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.
 Printed circuit board
Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.
 External circuit
Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.
NOTICE!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.
Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination
to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.
The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.
NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

Headquarters: 69, Suyuan Avenue, Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China Fax: +86-25-87178999
Manufactory: 18, Xinfeng Road, Jiangning, Nanjing 211111, China Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nrec.com
PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.13
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay iii

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
Documentation Structure
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:
1 Introduction
Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.
2 Technical Data
Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical
specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type
tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.
3 Operation Theory
Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.
4 Supervision
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.
5 Measurement and Recording

Introduce the management function (measurment and recording) of this relay.
6 Hardware
Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the
definition of pins of each plug-in module, typical wiring is provided.
7 Settings
List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,
and some notes about the setting application.
8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the
user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through
HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.
9 Configurable Function
Introduce how to make function configuration, binary input configuration, binary output
configuration and LED indicator configuration etc. through PCS-Explorer software.
10 Communication
Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,
IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.
iv PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
11 Installation
Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating
earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.
12 Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of
this relay.
13 Maintenance
A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.
14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.
15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.
Typographic and Graphical Conventions
Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
&
AND gate
≥1
OR gate
Comparator
BI Binary signal via opto-coupler
SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting
EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling
SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay v

Date: 2015-07-13
Preface
OTH Input of other signal
XXX Output signal
Timer
t
Time (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)
t
10ms 2ms
Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay dropoff (2ms), non-settable]
[XXX] 0ms
Timer (delay pickup, settable)
0ms [XXX]
Timer (delay dropoff, settable)
[XXX] [XXX]
Timer (delay pickup, delay dropoff, settable)
IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)
---xxx is the symbol
Symbol Corresponding Relationship
Basic Example
A, B, C L1, L2, L3 Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN
AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3
ABC L123 Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31
U (voltage) V U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2
vi PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-07-13
1 Introduction
1 Introduction
Table of Contents
1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1-a
1.1 Application....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Feature ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Abbreviation .................................................................................................... 1-4
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-a

Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
1-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
1.1 Application
PCS-915IC is a numerical busbar differential protection intended to be used for protecting and
monitoring various busbar arrangement of various voltage levels. It is capable to protect up to 25
bays including bus coupler/section.
PCS-915IC utilizes NR’s innovative hardware platform which supports both conventional CT/VT
and electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT). It is compliant to several communication
protocols, such as IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3.0 and Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP).
The maximized functions are introduced in this manual, for a specific project, some functions
maybe not configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed alarm signals, tripping signals, binary input signals, settings
and sampled values related with each bay and busbar will change with the
corresponding label settings.
In this instruction manual, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding
busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus
coupler bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
For example, the tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 can be
described as “@Bay02.50/51G.Op_Trp”, if the label setting of bay 02 i.e. [Name_Bay02]
is set as “Fdr01”, the displayed tripping signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay
02 is [Fdr01.50/51G.Op_Trp]. If [Name_Bay02] is set as “BC1”, the displayed tripping
signal of ground overcurrent protection of bay 02 is [BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]. Please refer
to Section “Label Settings” in Chapter 7 for details.
1.2 Function
PCS-915IC provides the following functions
1. Protection function
 Busbar differential protection (87B)
 Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection
 DPFC percentage restraint differential protection
 Bus coupler protection
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-1

Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
 Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)
 Overcurrent protection (50/51)
 Feeder protection
 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)
 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)
 Overcurrent protection (50/51)
NOTICE!
DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault

occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components, the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.
2. Auxiliary function
 Dynamic busbar replica
 CT circuit supervision
 VT circuit supervision
 Disconnector position alarm
1.3 Feature
1. Protection and Control
 Parallel calculation of double DSP system
 Independent fault detector element
 Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip
 Less than 20ms typical trip time for busbar differential protection
 High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection
 Matching to different CT ratios
 A well proven adaptive weighted anti-saturation algorithm
 Comprehensive event recorder
 Language switchover—English+ selected language
1-2 PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
2. Four kinds of clock synchronization methods
 Conventional
 PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level
 IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level
 PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the optical coupler
 PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the optical coupler
 SAS
 SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network
 Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol
 Advanced
 IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588
 IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface
 PPS (Fiber): Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface
 No clock syncronization
3. Event recorder and disturbance recorder
 1024 latest fault reports
 1024 latest self-supervision reports
 1024 latest status change of binary input reports
 32 latest fault waveforms (The file format of disturbance recorder is compatible with the
international COMTRADE file)
4. Communication
 Optional 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization
 Optional 2 or 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform
to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 Optional 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0
protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP
 Optional additional module that supports PRP.
 GOOSE and SV communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)

Date: 2013-12-13
1 Introduction
5. User Interface
 Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.
 1 RS-232 rear port for printer
 1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting
 Language switchover—English+ selected language
 Auxiliary software—PCS-Explorer
1.4 Abbreviation
Symbol Description
FD Fault detector
BBx Busbar No.x, x is the number of each busbar
BCy Bus coupler No.y, y is the number of each bus coupler
BSz Bus section No.z, z is the number of each bus section
feeder m Feeder No.m, m is the number of each feeder
bay n Bay No.n (includes each BC/BS and each feeder), n is the number of each bay
VCE Voltage controlled element
BBP Busbar differential protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFI Breaker failure initiation
DZP Dead zone fault protection
PD Pole disagreement protection
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
SAS Substation automatic system
RTU Remote terminal unit
DPFC Deviation of power frequency component
CT Current transformer
VT Voltage transformer
SV Sampled value

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
Table of Contents
2 Technical Data ................................................................................... 2-a
2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage ................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Mechanical Specifications.............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3
2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3
2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests............................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions....................................................................................... 2-6
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection .............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection................................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection......................................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7
2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection .............................................................................. 2-7
2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection ...................................................................................... 2-7

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.1 Electrical Specifications
2.1.1 Alternating Analog Current

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated current (In) 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In
-for 10s 30In
-for 1s 100In
-for half a cycle 250In
Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In
Accuracy ±0.5%In
2.1.2 Alternating Analog Voltage

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V
Linear to 1V~170V
Thermal withstand
-continuously 200V
-10s 260V
-1s 300V
Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un
Accuracy ±0.5%Un
2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc/220Vdc/250Vdc
Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc
Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
Burden
Quiescent condition <40W
Operating condition <60W
2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated voltage 24Vdc 48Vdc
Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA
On value 16.8-28.8Vdc 33.6-57.6Vdc
Off value <12Vdc <24Vdc

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc

Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
Rated voltage 110Vdc 125Vdc 220Vdc 250Vdc

Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA
On value 77-132Vdc 87.5-150Vdc 154-264Vdc 175-300Vdc
Off value <55Vdc <62.5Vdc <110Vdc <125Vdc
Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc
Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously)
Response time for logic input ≤1ms
2.1.5 Binary Output

1. Tripping/signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A
Pickup time (Typical) <8ms (3ms)
Dropoff time <5ms
0.65A@48Vdc
0.35A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.30A@125Vdc
0.20A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc
12A@3s
18A@1s
Short duration current
24A@0.5s
40A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations
Number Maximum 55
2. Signaling contact
Output mode Potential free contact Potential free contact

Maximal system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc 380Vac, 250Vdc
Continuous carry 8A 8A
Pickup time <10ms <10ms
Dropoff time <6ms <10ms
0.7A@48Vdc 1.00A@48Vdc
0.4A@110Vdc 0.50A@110Vdc
Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms) 0.3A@125Vdc 0.40A@125Vdc
0.2A@220Vdc 0.25A@220Vdc
0.15A@250Vdc 0.20A@250Vdc
Short duration current 12A@3s 12A@3s

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
15A@1s 15A@1s
20A@0.5s 20A@0.5s
30A@0.2s 30A@0.2s
Durability (Loaded contact) 10000 operations 10000 operations
Number Maximum 8 Maximum 3
2.2 Mechanical Specifications
Mounting Way Flush mounted

Housing color Silver grey
Approx. 35kg (8U chassis)
Weight per device
Approx. 10kg (4U extended chassis)
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate
Protection class
Front side IP40
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection terminals IP20
2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of display may be impaired below -20°C)
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C to +70°C
range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation
Pollution degree Ⅱ
Altitude <3000m
2.4 Communication Port
2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850
2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level
Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST
Fibre type Multi mode
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.2 For Process Level

Connector type LC
Transmission distance <2km
Wave length 1310nm
Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port

Connector type ST
Wave length 820nm
Margin Min +3.0dB
2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
2.5 Type Tests
2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007
Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005
2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I
Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I
2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements
2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

IEC 60255-22-1:2007
1MHz burst disturbance test Common mode: class III 2.5kV
Differential mode: class III 1.0kV
IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
Electrostatic discharge test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Radio frequency interference tests
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz

IEC 60255-22-4:2008
Fast transient disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Surge immunity test
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Conducted RF Electromagnetic
Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance
kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 61000-4-10:2001
immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m
Auxiliary power supply performance IEC60255-11: 2008

- Voltage dips Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset
-Voltage short interruptions 100ms for interruption without rebooting
2.6 Certifications
 ISO9001:2008
 ISO14001:2004
 OHSAS18001:2007
 ISO10012:2003
 CMMI L5
 EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999
 Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001
2.7 Protective Functions
The meanings of symbols mentioned in the following sections are given here.
In -- rated secondary current of CT
Un -- rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
2.7.1 Busbar Differential Protection
Current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater
Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un
Residual voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Negative-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
2.7.2 Switch-onto-fault Protection
2.7.3 Overcurrent Protection
Time setting range 0.00~10.00s
Tolerance of time setting ≤1%xSetting + 40ms
2.7.4 Pole Disagreement Protection
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
2.7.5 Bus Coupler Breaker Failure Protection
2.7.6 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection
Phase current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Residual current setting range 0.05In~20.00In
Negative-sequence current setting range 0.05In~20.00In

Date: 2013-12-13
2 Technical Data
Undervoltage setting range 0 ~Un
Zero-sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Negative sequence voltage setting range 0 ~Un
Accuracy of voltage setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

Date: 2013-12-13
3 Operation Theory
3 Operation Theory
Table of Contents
3 Operation Theory .............................................................................. 3-a
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements .................................................................. 3-1
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration ................................................. 3-7
3.4 Function Configuration ................................................................................ 3-10
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-13
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element.............................................................................................. 3-14
3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-22
3.5.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-22
3.5.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.5.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-27
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection ............................................................. 3-30

3.6.3 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32
3.6.4 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.6.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP) .................................................. 3-34

3.7.1 Fault Detector Element ...................................................................................................... 3-34
3.7.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-35
3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-37

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection ............................................... 3-38

3.8.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-39
3.8.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-40
3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-41
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection ........................................................................ 3-42

3.9.4 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.9.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-46
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection ........................................................... 3-51

3.10.1 Fault Detector Element .................................................................................................... 3-51
3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-51
3.10.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-51
3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-51
3.10.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.10.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-53
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) ................................................... 3-54

3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-56
3.11.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-56
3.11.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-58
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................. 3-59


Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-63
3.12.5 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.12.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-68

3.13.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-71
3.13.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-76
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-77

3.14.3 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-78
3.14.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker .......................................... 3-79

3.15.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-81
3.15.3 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-84
3.15.4 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-86
3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution.............. 3-86

3.16.2 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.17 GOOSE and SV Function ............................................................................ 3-90

3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality ........................................................................................ 3-91
3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay .................................................................................................... 3-91
3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input ................................................................................................ 3-92
3.17.4 I/O Signal ......................................................................................................................... 3-92
3.17.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-93
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-c

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
List of Figures
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB ................................................................................................................ 3-1
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)....................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-2
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT) ....................................................................... 3-3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) ........................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT) ..................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) ...................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT) ............................ 3-5
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT).............................. 3-6
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT) .......................... 3-7
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs) ............................. 3-7
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement ... 3-14
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential

element ................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element 3-18
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault ............................................. 3-21
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection .............................................................. 3-23
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element ................................................... 3-25
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection....................................................... 3-33
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection ....................................................... 3-36
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection .................................................................................... 3-40
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection ......................................................................... 3-45
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection ........................................................... 3-52
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS ......................................................................... 3-55
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP ........................................................................................... 3-56
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone) .......................... 3-57
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP ........................................................................................... 3-63
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure.................................................................................. 3-71
3-d PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current low value alarm .......................................... 3-72
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-72
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
.............................................................................................................................................. 3-73
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality ........................................................................ 3-74
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-75
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are
available) ............................................................................................................................. 3-76
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure .................................................................................. 3-78
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm ............................................................ 3-81
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm ............................................................. 3-82
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position ............................... 3-83
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm............................................................................. 3-84
Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2 ....................................................... 3-88
Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1 ....................................................... 3-88
Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
inside of the transfer bus disconnector) ......................................................................... 3-89
Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the
outside of the transfer bus disconnector)....................................................................... 3-90
List of Tables
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software ............................................. 3-8
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”........................................................... 3-9
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software.................................... 3-10
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP .................................................................... 3-18
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection ................................................... 3-25
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection ................................................ 3-26
Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings ............................................................... 3-27
Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection................................................. 3-30
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-33
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-e

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-33
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings ............................................................... 3-34
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ............................................ 3-36
Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection ......................................... 3-37
Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings ........................................................ 3-37
Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection .......................................... 3-38
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection............................................................. 3-40
Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection ......................................................... 3-41
Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings .................................................................. 3-41
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection .......................................................... 3-42
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection .............................................................. 3-46
Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-46
Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings........................................................................... 3-46
Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection ............................................................ 3-50
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection ................................................ 3-52
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection ............................................. 3-53
Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings ........................................................................................ 3-53
Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection .............................................. 3-54
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................... 3-57
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-58
Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings ........................................................ 3-58
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection............................................ 3-64
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection ........................................ 3-65
Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings ....................................................... 3-65
Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection ......................................... 3-68
Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-76
Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision ............................................................ 3-79
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector ......................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker ....................................................................... 3-80
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker ....................... 3-84
3-f PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker .................... 3-85
Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker .......................................................................... 3-86
Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution .................................................................. 3-90
Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution ............................................................... 3-90
Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function ........................................................ 3-92
Table 3.17-2 Function link ......................................................................................................... 3-93
Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link ............................................................................................ 3-93
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 3-g

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.1 Overview
PCS-915 can provide busbar differential protection (BBP), bus coupler/section protection (includes
overcurrent protection, switch-onto-fault protection, pole disagreement protection, dead zone fault
protection and breaker failure protection), feeder protection (includes overcurrent protection, pole
disagreement protection, dead zone fault protection and breaker failure protection), CT circuit
supervision and VT circuit supervision. For a specific project, some functions maybe not
configured or disabled according to user’s requirement.
The device has 2 plug-in modules (protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module) to
perform calculation. The protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of protection
elements, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detectors. Any fault
detector on fault detector DSP module picks up to provide positive supply of output relays. The
relays will trip only if the fault detector and the corresponding protection element operate
simultaneously. On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and
logic discrimination can be processed within one sampling period. The event recording and
protection logic calculation are completed simultaneously.
3.2 Supported Busbar Arrangements

The following figures show the applications of PCS-915 for several typical busbar arrangements.
BB: busbar; BC: bus coupler; BS: bus section.
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * * * *
……
VT1
BB1
Figure 3.2-1 Single BB

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
*
*
BS1
……
*
……
VT1 VT2
BB1 BB2
Figure 3.2-2 Single BB with one BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
*
BS1
……
*
*
…… VT2
VT1 CT2 CT1
BB1 BB2
Figure 3.2-3 Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
…… ……
VT1 VT2 VT3
* *
BS1 BS2
BB1 BB2 BB3
Figure 3.2-4 Single BB with two BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
…… ……
VT1 VT2 VT3
* * * *
CT2 CT1 CT2
BS1 BS2 CT1
BB1 BB2 BB3
Figure 3.2-5 Single BB with two BS (dual CTs)

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
……
VT1
* BB1
VT2
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.2-6 Double BB with one BC (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * * *
……
VT1
CT2
* BB1
VT2
BC1
* CT1 BB2
Figure 3.2-7 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs)

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
* …… * * …… *
*
VT1 BS1 VT1
BB1 BB1
* *
BC1 VT2 VT2 BC2
BB2 BB2
BS2
*
Figure 3.2-8 Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915-A
Panel B
PCS-915-B
* …… * * …… *
*
VT1 BS1 VT1
BB1 BB1
CT2 CT2 *
*
BC1 VT2 VT2 BC2
* CT1 CT1 *
BB2 BB2
BS2
*
Figure 3.2-9 Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Panel A
PCS-915
* * *
VT1 …… …… VT3
*
BS1
* BB1 BB3 *
VT2
BC1 BC2
BB2
Figure 3.2-10 Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
Panel A
PCS-915
* * *
VT1 …… …… VT3
*
BS1
BB1 BB3
CT2 CT2
* *
VT2
BC1 BC2
* CT1 CT1 *
BB2
Figure 3.2-11 Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
3.3 Market Ordering Table (MOT) Configuration

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC
platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. Please refer to Chapter 9
for detailed configuration method about PCS-Explorer software.
MOT is provided for users to order the device. According to the selected series number of MOT,
the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware related function can be configured
via the PCS-Explorer software (Please refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.3-1 MOT configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Application Remark
A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers
B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT) BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other arrangement, further modifications for
the program are required
Software Version
A: Standard 1 Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2 contents
Language
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals
Only a 8U chassis Each BC/BS
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)
is available (double CTs are
A 4U extended available) will take
B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device)
chassis is added up two terminals
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)
X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 The MON plug in module is NR1101F

(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + The MON plug in module is NR1102M
RS-232 (Printer) module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX The MON plug in module is NR1102N
(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc
1) “Voltage Concerned Functions”
If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected, all the voltage related functions will quit
(DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit supervision will not function, busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection will not controlled by respective voltage controlled
element), and all settings and information related to voltage will be hidden.
If “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions”, voltage
related settings and information can be displayed, but all the voltage related function will be
controlled by the device setting [En_Volt_BB] (refer to Section 7.1). If [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0”,
all the voltage related functions will be disabled (DPFC voltage FD element and VT circuit
supervision will not function, busbar differential protection and breaker failure protection will not
controlled by respective voltage controlled element); if [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1”, DPFC voltage
FD element and VT circuit supervision are enabled, voltage controlled element of busbar
differential protection and breaker failure protection will be controlled by respective logic setting
([87B.VCE.En] and [50BF.VCE.En]).
2) “Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI)”
In this option, if dual-position BI for disconnector is enabled, the device will get both normally
closed auxiliary contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the
position of the disconnector. If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled, the device will only get
normally open auxiliary contact of a disconnector to indicate the position of the disconnector.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled, the device will get both normally closed auxiliary
contact and normally open auxiliary contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the device will only get normally closed auxiliary
contact of a breaker to indicate the position of the breaker.
The concrete contents about the two options of “Software Version” are listed in following table.
Table 3.3-2 Contents of the option “Software Version”
Function Standard 1 Standard 2

Busbar differential protection √ √
BC/BS dead zone fault protection √ √

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BC/BS breaker failure protection √ √

BC/BS pole disagreement protection √ √
BC/BS overcurrent protection √ √
BC/BS switch-onto-fault protection √ √
Feeder breaker failure protection √ √
Feeder dead zone fault protection √
Feeder pole disagreement protection √
Feeder overcurrent protection √
Configurable I/O, LED and programmable logic √ √
CT and VT circuit failure supervision (CTS, VTS) √ √
Timing standard: PPS, PPM, IRIG-B, SNTP √ √
NOTICE!
If “Standard 1” is selected for “Software Version”, feeder dead zone fault protection,
feeder pole disagreement protection and feeder overcurrent protection are disabled,
and all the related settings and information are hidden.
3.4 Function Configuration

The ancillary protection functions also can be configured via the PCS-Explorer software (Please
refer to Chapter 9 for detailed configuration method).
Table 3.4-1 Function configuration table in PCS-Explorer software
Basic information configuration
1 All protective function Enable/Disable
2 Phase-segregated breaker position Enable/Disable
3 Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP Enable/Disable
4 Enforced disconnector position Enable/Disable
5 BC/BS breaker substitution Enable/Disable
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured

6 Enable/Disable
according to each bay
7 Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay Enable/Disable
Protective function configuration
8 Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable/Disable
9 Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection Enable/Disable
10 IDMT overcurrent characteristic Enable/Disable
DNP3.0
11 TCP1 Enable/Disable

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1) “All protective function”
If it is set as “Enable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are enabled.
All the protective function will be controlled by [BI_En_Prot], [Link_Prot], their respective enabling
binary input and function link. If [BI_En_Prot] is de-energized or [Link_Prot] is set as “0”, all the
protective functions are disabled.
If it is set as “Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not
configured. All the protective function will only be controlled by their respective enabling binary
input and function link.
Takes BBP as an example, if “All protective function” is set as “Enable”, BBP can be enabled only
if [BI_En_Prot] and [87B.BI_En] are all energized and the function links [87B.Link] and [Link_Prot]
are set as “1”. If any condition is not met, BBP is disabled. If “All protective function” is set as
“Disable”, the binary input [BI_En_Prot] and the function link [Link_Prot] are not configured, and all
the protective functions will not be controlled by them.
2) “Phase-segregated breaker position”
If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated breaker position binary input is configured, if it is set as

“Disable”, three-phase breaker position binary input is configured.
3) “Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP”
If it is set as “Enable”, phase-segregated tripping contact and three-phase tripping contact for
initiating breaker failure protection are configured, if it is set as “Disable”, only three-phase tripping
contact for initiating breaker failure protection is configured.
4) “Enforced disconnector position”
If it is set as “Enable”, and the corresponding enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS]
is set as “1”, the disconnector position of bay n will be decided by function link(s)
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..), if [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] is set as “1”, BBx disconnector
of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if
[@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBn] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBm] are set as “1” at the same time (n≠m),
the corresponding alarm signal [Alm_IntLinkx] will be issued. If the enforced disconnector position
link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, [@Bayn.Link_DS_@BBx] (x=1, 2 …..) are all set as “0”, but
current is detected in bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued
simultaneously.
If it is set as “Disable”, the position status of disconnector is identified according to normally open
auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector.
5) BC/BS breaker substitution
For the busbar system arrangement that BC/BS breaker can be used temporarily to substitute one
of feeder breakers through transfer bus, it should be set as “Enable”, otherwise it should be set as
“Disable”.
6) Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is configured according
to each bay

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
When it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary inputs and function links of feeder dead zone fault
protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection
are configured according to each bay. For each bay, disabling binary input is not configured.
When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one enabling binary input and function link of feeder dead
zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the enabling binary input and
function link of overcurrent protection is [@Bayn.50/51.BI_En] and [@Bayn.50/51.Link]
respectively (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the enabling binary input and function link of
overcurrent protection is [50/51.BI_En] and [50/51.Link] respectively (one for all bays).
7) Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each bay
When it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection, switch-onto-fault
protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection are configured according to
each bay.
When it is set as “Disable”, there is only one logic setting of feeder dead zone fault protection,
switch-onto-fault protection, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement protection for all bays.
Takes overcurrent protection as an example, if it is set as “Enable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [@Bayn.50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [@Bayn.50/51G.En] (ground
overcurrent protection) (one for per bay); if it is set as “Disable”, the logic setting of overcurrent
protection is [50/51P.En] (phase overcurrent protection) and [50/51G.En] (one for all bays).
8) “Breaker failure protection re-tripping function”
When it is set as “Enable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be enabled, once BFP
operates, it will operate to re-trip concerned breaker after the time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp]. If it is
set as “Disable”, breaker failure protection re-tripping function will be disabled and the time setting
for BFP [50BF.t_ReTrp] will be hidden.
9) “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection”
When it is set as “Enable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is enabled. Then if the releasing voltage controlled element binary input is
energized and the corresponding logic setting [Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1”, the
voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for the bay will be released. If the
releasing voltage controlled element binary input is energized for over 10s, it will be invalid and an
alarm signal will be issued.
When it is set as “Disable”, the binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
failure protection is disabled.
10) “IDMT overcurrent characteristic”
When “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Enable”, there will be an option of IDMT
characteristic for both BC/BS overcurrent protection and feeder overcurrent protection. When
“IDMT overcurrent characteristic” is set as “Disable”, all settings related to IDMT characteristic will

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
be hidden.
11) “TCPx”
When it is set as “Enable”, network No.x DNP client is enabled, then the related DNP
communication settings correspond to network No.x will be released. When it is set as “Disable”,
network No.x DNP client is disabled, then the related DNP communication settings correspond to
network No.x will be hidden.
If DNP3.0 protocol is not adopted, “TCPx” (x=1, 2, 3 and 4) should be set as “disable”.
3.5 Busbar Differential Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.5, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar and
“@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay. For a bus coupler
bay, “@BCy” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus coupler. For
a bus section bay, “@BSz” is also used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
section.
The primary protection of PCS-915 is phase-segregated percentage restraint differential

protection. The differential circuits include check zone differential circuit and discriminating zone
differential circuits of each busbar zone. The check zone differential element is used to distinguish
between internal and external fault of the overall busbar system, it measures the current from all
the circuits connected to the busbar system except BC and BS (For the occasion that BS is at the
edge of the protected zone, BS will be taken as an feeder bay, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the BS current will be included in check zone differential element). The discriminating zone
differential elements are used to select faulty zone by measuring the current of all the circuits
connected to individual zones of the busbar system separated by BC and BS.
Figure 3.5-1 shows a primary power system of double busbars with one BC (single CT)
arrangement, the two busbars are defined as busbar No.1 (BB1) and busbar No.2 (BB2)
respectively. The polarity mark of feeder CT is on the busbar side, and the polarity mark of BC CT
is on BB1 side.
For usual busbar system arrangement, the polarity mark definition are shown in Figure 3.2-1 to
Figure 3.2-11.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Discriminative Discriminative
Check zone
zone No.1 zone No.2
……
* * * *
BB1
*
BC1
BB2
Figure 3.5-1 Sketch diagram of double busbars with one BC (single CT) arrangement
NOTICE!
The protective device ONLY identifies the physical position of busbar, ignoring the
number of busbar, takes the busbar arrangement in Figure 3.5-1 as an example, if only
one CT is available at BC1, the protective device will refer the busbar of which the
polarity of BC1 CT is towards as BB1.
Discriminative zone No.1 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB1. Discriminative

zone No.2 is defined as discriminative differential element of BB2.
3.5.1 Fault Detector (FD) Element
PCS-915 provides three independent FD elements for busbar differential protection, which are
DPFC voltage FD element, DPFC current FD element and differential current FD element. If any of
these three elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from busbar differential protection. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
1. DPFC voltage FD element
When DPFC voltage of any phase of any busbar is larger than the threshold, DPFC voltage FD
element picks up, the operating criterion is:
Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un Equation 3.5-1
Where:
Δu: Instantaneous value of phase-to-ground DPFC voltage
ΔUFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually voltage changing

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
0.05Un: Fixed threshold value, Un is the rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.
If “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” or VT
circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will quit automatically.
2. DPFC current FD element
If DPFC check zone restraint current is larger than the threshold, DPFC current fault detector
element will operate, the operating criterion is:
Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In Equation 3.5-2
Where:
Δsi: Instantaneous value of DPFC check zone restraint current of any phase (scalar sum of current
change of all circuits/bays for check zone)
ΔSIFloat: Float threshold value, automatically varied with the gradually current changing
0.5In: Fixed threshold value, In is the rated secondary current of reference CT.
3. Differential current FD element
When any phase of the check zone differential current is larger than the setting, this element will
operate. The operating criterion is:
ID> [87B.I_Pkp] Equation 3.5-3
Where:
ID: Differential phase current of check zone
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
3.5.2 Function Description
3.5.2.1 Percentage Restraint Differential Element
The percentage restraint differential element includes steady-state percentage restraint differential
element and DPFC percentage restraint differential element.
 Steady-state percentage restraint differential element
m
The differential current: ID = Ij1
j
m
The restraint current: IR = I
j1
j

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
The operating criterion is:
I D  [87B.I _ Pkp]
 Equation 3.5-4
 I D  KI R
Where:
K: Restraint coefficient of steady-state differential element
Ij: The current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
[87B.I_Pkp]: Current setting of busbar differential protection
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-2.
ID
ID=IR Operation region
ID=kIR
[87B.I_Pkp]
IR
Figure 3.5-2 Operation characteristic of steady-state percentage restraint differential element
Take into consideration both the CT anti-saturation capability and the sensitivity of steady-state
check zone differential element for a fault occurred in the weak source bus zone when the BC
breaker is open, dual restraint coefficients [87B.SlopeH_CZ, 87B.SlopeL_CZ] and
[87B.SlopeH_DZ, 87B.SlopeL_DZ] are adopted for steady-state check zone and discriminative
zones respectively.
When one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar steady-state percentage restraint
differential protection will operate.
1. Steady-state check zone differential element with high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_CZ],
0.5 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with
low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_DZ], 0.5 is recommended) operates.
2. Steady-state check zone differential element with low restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeL_CZ],
0.3 is recommended) operates and steady-state discriminative zone differential element with

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
high restraint coefficient ([87B.SlopeH_DZ], 0.6 is recommended) operates.
 DPFC percentage restraint differential element
The DPFC percentage restraint differential element is adopted to enhance the performance of
busbar protection against high impedance fault and the influence of heavy loading condition. The
busbar DPFC differential protection is formed by DPFC percentage restraint differential element
and steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient 0.2.
m
The DPFC differential current: ΔID =  ΔI
j1
j
m
The DPFC restraint current: ΔIR =  ΔI
j1
j
The operating criterion is:
ΔID  ΔIDFloat  I DP ickup


I D  0.2I R Equation 3.5-5
 ΔID  K / ΔIR

Where:
K': DPFC restraint coefficient
ΔIj: DPFC current of the j-th feeder (Feeder j) connected
ΔIDFloat: Float threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current
IDPickup: Fixed threshold value of DPFC check zone differential current, which derives from the
setting of [87B.I_Pkp]
The operation characteristic is shown as Figure 3.5-4.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
ΔID
ΔID=ΔIR
Operation region
ΔID=k'ΔIR
[87B.I_Pkp]
ΔIR
IRSet
Figure 3.5-3 Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential element
Similar to steady-state percentage restraint differential element, dual restraint coefficients are also
introduced to DPFC differential element. The restraint coefficients are fixed at [0.65, 0.3] and [0.65,
0.5] for DPFC check zone and discriminating zones respectively.
When the steady-state check zone percentage restraint differential element with fixed restraint
coefficient of 0.2 operates, if one of the following conditions is fulfilled, the busbar DPFC
percentage restraint differential protection will operate.
1. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with high restraint coefficient (0.65)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with low
restraint coefficient (0.5) operates.
2. DPFC check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient (0.3)
operates and DPFC discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element with high
restraint coefficient (0.65) operates.
Following table shows the restraint coefficients for DPFC differential element.
Table 3.5-1 Restraint coefficients of DPFC BBP
Check Zone Discriminative Zone

PCS-915IC
High Low High Low
DPFC differential element 0.65 0.3 0.65 0.5
3.5.2.2 Voltage Controlled Element of Busbar Differential Protection (VCE_BBP)
Voltage controlled element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The operating criteria are:
UP ≤ [87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-6

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3U0 ≥ [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.5-7
U2 ≥ [87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-8
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage (calculated internally)
U2: Negative sequence voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP ≤[87B.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.5-9
U2 ≥[87B.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.5-10
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage
[87B.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BBP
[87B.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BBP
VCE_BBP will be controlled by the logic setting [87B.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BBP will be
disabled and busbar differential protection will not controlled by VCE_BBP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BBP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
busbar differential protection will not controlled by voltage element.
If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BBP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, busbar differential protection will not controlled
by voltage element.
Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic
setting [87B.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BBP is enabled.
If VCE_BBP (or VCE_BFP) of BBx operates for over 3s, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VCE] will be

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
issued.
3.5.2.3 Faulty Busbar Zone Discrimination
The check zone differential element calculates the current from all circuits connected to the entire
busbar system except BC and BS to distinguish between internal and external fault. The
discriminating zone differential elements calculate the current of all the circuits connected to
individual zones via replica image of disconnector position to determine faulty zone.
When the operation criterion of check zone differential element (steady-state check zone
differential element is supervised by CT saturation detector 2 and DPFC check zone differential
element is supervised by CT saturation detector 1, to be described in the following section) and
any discriminating zone differential element is fulfilled, voltage controlled element of BBP of any
connected busbar is released, the busbar differential protection will operate to trip all bays
connected to the faulty busbar.
The protection has a feature of “inter-connection operation mode”, the feature will be effective
automatically under the following conditions.
1. A binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx] (x=1, 2, ……) is energized, it should be energized when two
bus zones are coupled together and unable to detach for a particular system operation
condition.
2. On-load transfer condition (when two busbar disconnectors of one feeder are closed at the
same time).
Under the inter-connection operation mode, the discriminating zone differential elements measure
the current signals are the same as that of check zone differential element. The coupled busbars
will be tripped simultaneously when there is a fault.
3.5.2.4 Backup Busbar Differential Elements
If only the check zone percentage restraint differential element (supervised by CT saturation
detector 2) operates, two stages of backup protection with fixed time delay are applied to trip the
corresponding circuit breakers (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Dly_Biased]). Stage 1 of
backup protection will trip BC/BS (when voltage controlled element of any busbar connected with
the BC/BS is released or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders of which current
is larger than 0.04*In and does not have disconnector position after 240ms. Stage 2 of backup
protection will trip the feeders connected to the busbar of which voltage controlled element has
been released (or voltage controlled element is disabled) and the feeders with current larger than
2*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) after 480ms.
3.5.2.5 Detection of CT Saturation
Two detectors are used to prevent unwanted tripping caused by severe CT saturation during
external close up fault. If the differential current is determined to be caused by CT saturation, the
device will block busbar differential protection to prevent mal-operation.
 CT saturation detector 1
When DPFC voltage or current FD element operates, the adaptive weighted algorithm for CT

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
saturation detector will be activated. In case of busbar fault occurs, DPFC differential element will
operate almost at the same time with DPFC voltage FD element or DPFC current FD element,
whereas for external fault, DPFC differential element will not operate before CT saturation at the
fault incipient stage, it will only operate after DPFC voltage element and DPFC current element in
case CT is saturated. Adaptive weighted algorithm for CT saturation detector is derived from the
difference of operating time among these DPFC elements. In coordination with DPFC differential
element, it has performed excellently to distinguish between internal and external fault with CT
saturation.
 CT saturation detector 2
Harmonic restraint element is used in CT saturation detector 2 by analyzing the waveforms of

differential current harmonics. The detector enables the busbar differential element to remain
stable for an external fault with CT saturation while to maintain fast tripping for the external fault
evolved to internal fault on the same phase.
The blocking signal of CT saturation detector 2 will only last for 500ms. After that the busbar
differential element is released to operate for complicated fault conditions and minimized affected
area. In practical cases, CT transient saturation will not be more than 500ms.
Figure 3.5-4 Waveform of CT saturation during external fault
Figure 3.5-4 shows the current waveforms recorded in dynamic simulation with heavy CT
saturation during external phase-to-phase fault. Protection stability is well achieved in this extreme
case.
3.5.2.6 External Block Signal
PCS-915 provides a binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] to block BBP through external binary signal
(controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]). If [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk] is set as “1”, BBP will
be blocked if the binary input [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized. However, if the binary input
[87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over 1 second, PCS-915IC will issue an alarm

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk] and the blocking for BBP is released.
3.5.2.7 Closing Binary Input
If feeder dead zone fault protection is enabled, in order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when
closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder is open, the feeder current is included in
differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes
from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s, an alarm
[@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.
3.5.3 Function Block Diagram
87B
87B.BI_ExtBlk 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_En 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC
87B.BI_Blk
87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn
87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52a
87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_52b
87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_A_52a 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy
@Bayn.BI_B_52a 87B.Op_DPFC
@Bayn.BI_C_52a 87B.Op_Biased
@Bayn.BI_A_52b 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
87B.Op
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
87B.Op_Dly1_Biased
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased
AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased
@BBx.AlmH_Diff 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased
@BCy.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased
@BSz.AlmH_CTS 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased
@Bayn.BI_Cls 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased
87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased
87B.FD
87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk
87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
@BBx.Alm_VCE
87B.Alm_Off
@Bayn.Alm_Cls
For a BS, Just use “BSz” to instead of “BCy” in the above function block diagram.
3.5.4 Logic
BB1 logic is shown as follows as an example, logic of other bus zone(s) is(are) similar.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG Disconnector position abnormality
&
EN [87B.En_DSAlm_Blk]
EN [87B.En_BI_ExtBlk]
0 1s
& ≥1
BI [87B.BI_ExtBlk]
SIG CT circuit failure
&
EN [87B.En_CTS_Blk]
SIG DPFC DIF
CT saturation
SIG DPFC DIF 1
detector 1
SIG DPFC current FD element

&
& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_DPFC
≥1
SIG DPFC voltage FD element
SIG SP DIF (K=0.2)
&
SIG SP DIF 1 (K=0.2)
SIG HM REL 1
≥1
500ms 0
&
SIG SP DIF 1 &

& 87B.Op_Trp@BB1_Biased
SIG HM REL
≥1
≥1 Diff_BB1
500ms 0
&
SIG SP DIF
SIG 87B is enabled
SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP 1
& 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
SIG Voltage_Rls_BBP x
SIG SP DIF x
240ms 0
& 87B.Op_Dly1
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is
SIG
in service 480ms 0
87B.Op_Dly2
SIG Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In
& 87B.FD
SIG Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un ≥1
SET ID>[87B.I_Pkp]
Figure 3.5-5 Logic of busbar differential protection
Where:
Disconnector position abnormality: if current is detected in a bay but the bay has no disconnector
positions for any busbars.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
DPFC current FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.
DPFC voltage FD element: please refer to Section 3.5.1.
DPFC DIF: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
DPFC DIF1: DPFC percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for check zone.
SP DIF 1: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for bus zone No.1.
SP DIF x: Steady-state percentage restraint differential element for any bus zone.
HM REL: Harmonic release element for check zone.
HM REL1: Harmonic release element for bus zone No.1.
87B is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[87B.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [87B.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [87B.Link] and logic setting [87B.En] are set as “1”).
Voltage_Rls_BBP 1: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage

controlled element of BBP of BB1 operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2 for details.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by VCE_BBP or voltage

controlled element of BBP of any busbar operates, please refer to Section 3.5.2.2.
Voltage_Rls_BBP x & BBx is in service: Busbar differential protection is not controlled by

VCE_BBP or voltage controlled element of BBP of any energized busbar operates, please refer to
Section 3.5.2.2.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by voltage controlled element) operates.
Δu>ΔUFloat+0.05Un， Δsi>ΔSIFloat+0.5In， ID> [87B.I_Pkp]: Please refer to Section 3.5.1.
87B.FD: Any FD element for busbar differential protection picks up.
Different from BC, busbar differential protection operating to trip BS is not controlled by VCE_BBP.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG BBx is in service BBx is in service
SIG Ua<87B.VCE.U_Set
& 3s 0 @BBx.Alm_VCE
SIG Ub<87B.VCE.U_Set
VCE_BBP x
SIG UC<87B.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>87B.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>87B.VCE.U2_Set
SIG Ua<50BF.VCE.U_Set
≥1
SIG Ub<50BF.VCE.U_Set
SIG UC<50BF.VCE.U_Set ≥1
SIG 3U0>50BF.VCE.3U0_Set
SIG U2>50BF.VCE.U2_Set VCE_BFP x
&
SIG 50BF is enabled
Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of voltage controlled element
Where:
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
50BF is enabled: Please refer to Section 3.12.4.
VCE_BBP x: Voltage controlled element of busbar differential protection of BBx operates.
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element of breaker failure protection of BBx operates.
@BBx.Alm_VCE: VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
3.5.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.5-2 Input signals of busbar differential protection
No. Signal Description
1 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling BBP
2 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BBP
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
3 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode
4 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP
5 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure
6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
7 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure
Differential current high value alarm signal of BBx, discriminating zone

8 @BBx.AlmH_Diff
differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS] for over 5s.
9 @Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx Normally closed auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of bay n
11 @Bayn.BI_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
12 @Bayn.BI_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay

13 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay

14 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
n
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of

15 @Bayn.BI_C_52a
bay n
16 @Bayn.BI_A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
17 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
18 @Bayn.BI_C_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
19 @Bayn.BI_Cls Binary input of closing circuit breaker of bay n
Table 3.5-3 Output signals of busbar differential protection
1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates
2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates
6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates
7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates
8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates
9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates
10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates
Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip

13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased
BBx
14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
17 87B.Op_Trp@BCy Busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
18 87B.Op_Trp@BSz Busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
19 87B.Op_A_Trp@BCy Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
20 87B.Op_B_Trp@BCy Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
21 87B.Op_C_Trp@BCy Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BCy
22 87B.Op_A_Trp@BSz Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
23 87B.Op_B_Trp@BSz Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
24 87B.Op_C_Trp@BSz Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip BSz
25 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
26 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar
DPFC busbar differential protection or steady-state busbar differential

27 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx

28 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar
29 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking BBP is energized for over 1s
Alarm signal indicating that differential current FD element picks up for

30 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased
over 10s
31 @BBx.Alm_VCE VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up for over 3s
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled. If the logic setting

[87B.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP can be
32 87B.Alm_Off disabled by the corresponding enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled will
be issued
33 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [BI_Cls_@Bayn] is energized for over 10s
3.5.6 Settings
 Busbar Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBBP Settings
Table 3.5-4 Busbar differential protection settings
No. Name Range Step Remark
1 87B.I_Pkp 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Pickup value of differential current
High restraint coefficient for steady-state

2 87B.SlopeH_CZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.5 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

3 87B.SlopeL_CZ 0.30-0.80 0.01 check zone, 0.3 is recommended, less
than 0.3 is not recommended
High restraint coefficient for steady-state

4 87B.SlopeH_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.6 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended
Low restraint coefficient for steady-state

5 87B.SlopeL_DZ 0.50-0.80 0.01 discriminative zone, 0.5 is recommended,
less than 0.3 is not recommended
6 I_AlmH_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit failure
7 I_AlmL_CTS 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting of CT circuit abnormality

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
8 87B.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE for BBP
9 87B.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V Residual voltage setting of VCE for BBP
Negative-sequence voltage setting of

10 87B.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V
VCE for BBP
1: Enabling busbar differential protection

11 87B.En 0,1 1
0: Disabling busbar differential protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if BBP is

disabled
12 87B.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if BBP is
disabled
1: two stages of backup busbar differential

protection is enabled
13 87B.En_Dly_Biased 0,1 1
0: two stages of backup busbar differential
protection is disabled
1: breaker failure protection is initiated if

busbar differential protection operates to
14 87B.En_Init50BF 0,1 1 trip
0: breaker failure protection can not be
initiated by busbar differential protection
1: BBP is controlled by the binary input

[87B.BI_ExtBlk], once [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is
15 87B.En_BI_ExtBlk 0,1 1 energized, BBP will be blocked.
0: BBP will not be controlled by the binary
input [87B.BI_ExtBlk]
1: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can

be reset automatically after the CT circuit
returns to normal condition
16 En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit failure alarm signal can
not be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
1: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal

can be reset automatically after the CT
circuit returns to normal condition
17 En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS 0,1 1
0: the CT circuit abnormality alarm signal
can not be reset automatically since the
CT circuit returns to normal condition
1: If any disconnector position alarm is

issued, once the abnormality of
disconnector position disappears, the
18 En_AutoRecov_DS 0,1 1
alarm will be reset automatically.
0: If any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
energizing the disconnector position

confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS]
Enabling busbar differential protection

being blocked by disconnector position
abnormality.
1: if current is detected in a feeder but the
feeder has no disconnector positions for
any busbars, busbar differential protection
19 87B.En_DSAlm_Blk 0,1 1
will be blocked.
0: busbar differential protection will not be
blocked for the disconnector position
abnormality condition.
“0” is recommended. If it is not configured
for a project, its default value is “0”.
1: busbar differential protection is blocked

if CT circuit fails
0: busbar differential protection is not
20 87B.En_CTS_Blk 0,1 1
controlled by CT circuit failure
If it is not configured for a project, its
default value is “0”.
1: BBP is controlled by VCE

21 87B.VCE.En 0,1 1
0: BBP will not be controlled by VCE
Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT.
1. [87B.I_Pkp]
It should ensure busbar differential protection sensitive enough under minimum fault level
condition and should be larger than maximum load current of its outlets (in order to prevent BBP
from mal-operation when CT secondary circuit fails).
2. [I_AlmL_CTS]
This setting is applied to better identifying the abnormality of CT circuit of light load feeder and
shunt of CT circuit, etc. It should be smaller than [I_AlmH_CTS] and can be set as
0.75*[I_AlmH_CTS].
3. [I_AlmH_CTS]
It should be larger than unbalance current in normal operation mode. The recommended value is
0.06In~0.1In.
4. [87B.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is a symmetric fault occurring in the busbar zone.
The recommended value is 0.7Un (Un: Rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT). If the
system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the setting should be set as
phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings” in Chapter 7.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
5. [87B.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal operation mode. It is invalid
if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.
6. [87B.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BBP sensitive enough when there is an unsymmetrical fault occurring in the busbar
zone and it should be larger than the maximum negative sequence voltage in normal operation
mode.
 Function Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
Table 3.5-5 Function links of busbar differential protection
No. Symbol Remark

1 87B.Link
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

2 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
For BBP, the relation is “AND” among the function link [87B.Link], the corresponding enabling
binary input [87B.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [87B.En].
For [Link_IntLinkx], the relation is “OR” among the function link and the corresponding enabling
binary input [BI_En_IntLinkx].
3.6 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.6, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
One CT or two CTs can be configured for BC/BS. BC/BS dead zone fault protection can operate
under two conditions: BC/BS breaker is open or BC/BS breaker is closed.
3.6.1.1 One CT BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that only one CT is available, there will be a blind spot for a fault occurs between
BC/BS breaker and BC/BS CT, the fault can not be cleared after busbar on the breaker side is

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, BC/BS dead zone fault protection is provided.
 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is closed
After busbar differential protection sends the command to trip BC/BS, if the BC/BS breaker has
been tripped but the BC/BS current is still detected, then after a time delay of [BC.50DZ.t_Op], the
BC/BS dead zone fault protection will operate to issue a signal and the BC/BS current will be
excluded from discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected
busbars.
 Under the condition that BC/BS breaker is open
If the two connected busbars are in service and BC/BS breaker is open, in order to prevent both
busbars from tripping for an dead zone fault, the BC/BS current will be excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential element of the connected two busbars, busbar
differential protection will operate to trip the busbar directly connected to the CT to clear the dead
zone fault.
3.6.1.2 Two CTs BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
For BC/BS that double CTs are available, if BC/BS breaker is closed, there is no blind spot for a
internal fault, so BC/BS dead zone fault protection will not function.
If BC/BS breaker is open, BC/BS dead zone fault protection will function as same as that of one
CT BC/BS under the condition that BC/BS is open.
3.6.1.3 Special Situation
If BS current can affect the check zone differential current (such as BS in Figure 3.2-9, the BS
current will be calculated in check zone and discriminating zone differential current), dead zone
fault protection is not configured for the BS (the fault can be cleared by BS breaker failure
protection, refer to Section 3.11). The reason is: if the load current of BS CT is small, and the
breaker position of BS is abnormal (the actual breaker position is closed, but it is identified as open
for the device), then if dead zone fault protection is configured (the BS current is excluded from
discriminating zone percentage restraint differential elements of the two connected busbars), it will
lead the busbar differential protection mal-operate for an external fault.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BB1
BC/BS CT
Dead zone fault
BC/BS Breaker
BB2
BC/BS 50DZ
87B.Op_Trp@BCy 50DZ.Op_@BCy
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
87B.Op_Trp@BBx
3.6.3 Logic
The logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as
an example).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG BB1 is in service

&
SIG Ia_BC1<0.04In 0 400ms

&
SIG Ib_BC1<0.04In & &
SIG Ic_BC1<0.04In
SIG Breaker of BC1 is open

BC1 current is excluded from discriminating
zone percentage differential circuit
≥1
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1 &
SIG DIF_CZ
SIG Ia_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] BC.50DZ.t_Op 0

&
SIG Ib_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1
SIG Ic_BC1>[BC.50DZ.I_Set]
& @BC1.50DZ.Op
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
Figure 3.6-1 Logic of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1;
Breaker of BC1 is open: please refer to Section 0;
DIF_CZ: Check zone percentage restraint differential element with low restraint coefficient.
3.6.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.6-1 Input signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx Busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx
Table 3.6-2 Output signals of BC/BS dead zone fault protection
1 @BCy.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BCy operates
2 @BSz.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of BSz operates
3.6.5 Settings
 BC Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.6-3 BC dead zone fault protection settings
Current setting for BC/BS dead zone fault

1 BC.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for BC/BS dead zone fault

2 BC.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
protection, 150ms is recommended.
3.7 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection (DZP)

NOTICE!
and sampled values related with each bay will change with the corresponding label
settings.
In Section 3.7, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding feeder bay.
3.7.1 Fault Detector Element
Feeder dead zone fault protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder DZP ([50DZ.FD]), as shown in Figure 3.7-1, if any phase current of feeder
bay n is larger than [Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] and current of feeder bay n is excluded from differential
current, FD element for feeder DZP picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then
available and wait for the tripping signal from feeder DZP. The fault detector output signal will last
for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a fault occurs between breaker and busbar CT of a feeder bay, the fault can not be cleared even
the breaker is tripped. In order to clear the fault quickly, dead zone fault protection for each feeder
bay is provided.
If the breaker of a feeder is open, and three phase currents of the feeder are all smaller than 0.04I n,
then the feeder current will be excluded from differential elements which prevent BBP from
mal-operation for the fault in the dead zone. For a fault occurred between circuit breaker and CT,
FD element of feeder DZP picks up for over 20ms, dead zone fault protection will operates and
initiates transfer trip to trip remote circuit breaker.
In order to prevent BBP from mal-operation when closing onto the fault, when breaker of a feeder
is open, the feeder current is included in differential circuit instantaneously if the closing binary
input of the feeder [@Bayn.BI_Cls] changes from “0” to “1”. However, if the binary input
[@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10 second, an alarm [@Bayn.Alm_Cls] will be issued.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Busbar
Feeder breaker
Dead zone fault
Feeder CT
Feeder 50DZ
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50DZ.Op

@Bayn.BI_52a @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_52b @Bayn.Alm_Cls
@Bayn.BI_A_52a
@Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_B_52a
@Bayn.BI_C_52a
@Bayn.BI_A_52b
@Bayn.BI_B_52b
@Bayn.BI_C_52b
@Bayn.Alm_52b
@Bayn.BI_Cls
Fdr.50DZ.BI_En or @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk
3.7.4 Logic
The logic of dead zone fault protection is shown as Figure 3.7-1.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ia_Bayn<0.04In
≥1
SIG Ib_Bayn<0.04In &
SIG Ic_Bayn<0.04In
0 1s
BI [@Bayn.BI_Cls]
SIG [@Bayn.Alm_52b] & Bay n current is not included in differential current

SIG TBD of bay n is closed
SIG Breaker of bay n is open
SIG Ia_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] @Bayn.50DZ.FD

Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0
SIG Ib_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] ≥1 & [@Bayn.50DZ.Op]
SIG Ic_Bayn>[Fdr.50DZ.I_Set] [@Bayn.Op_TT]
SIG Bayn.50DZ is enabled
Figure 3.7-1 Logic of feeder dead zone fault protection
Where:
@Bayn.50DZ.FD: FD element for feeder bay n dead zone fault protection picks up.
TBD of bay n is closed: transfer bus disconnector (TBD) of bay n is closed.
Bayn.50DZ is enabled: dead zone fault protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling
binary input ([Fdr.50DZ.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50DZ.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling
binary input [50DZ.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([Fdr.50DZ.Link] or [@Bayn.50DZ.Link]) and logic setting ([Fdr.50DZ.En] or [Bayn.50DZ.En]) are
set as “1”).
3.7.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.7-1 Input signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary
1 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
input and function link of a protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
2 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
3 Fdr.50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

4 @Bayn.Alm_52b
current can still be detected in bay n

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.7-2 Output signals of feeder dead zone fault protection
1 @Bayn.50DZ.Op DZP of bay n operates
DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit

2 @Bayn.Op_TT
breaker
Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP FD element of bay n picks up for
3 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp
over 10s
4 @Bayn.Alm_Cls Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is energized for over 10s
3.7.6 Settings
 Dead Zone Fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt Settings50DZ Settings
Table 3.7-3 Feeder dead zone fault protection settings
Current setting for feeder dead zone fault

1 Fdr.50DZ.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
protection, 0.1In is recommended.
Time delay for feeder dead zone fault

2 Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0.00~4.90s 0.01s
protection, 20ms is recommended.
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault

protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
3 Bayn.50DZ.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection
of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection of bay n
Logic setting of feeder dead zone fault

protection, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
protective element is configured according to
4 Fdr. 50DZ.En 0,1 1 each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault
protection
 Function Link

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.7-4 Function links of feeder dead zone fault protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
1 Fdr.50DZ.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay

n (it is configured when the basic information configuration
“Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
2 @Bayn.50DZ.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4))
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
For feeder dead zone fault protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
corresponding enabling binary input and the corresponding logic setting.
3.8 BC/BS Switch-onto-fault (SOTF) Protection

NOTICE!
In Section 3.8, for a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus coupler, for a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label
setting of corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection, if any phase current of
BC/BS is larger than the current setting [50SOTF.I_Set], FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection
(@BCy.50SOTF.FD or @BSz.50SOTF.FD) picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is
then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS SOTF protection. The fault detector
output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
If a busbar is first energized via a BC or BS after maintenance or newly installed, a feature of

BC/BS SOTF is incorporated in the PCS-915 to trip the BC/BS immediately when it is closed on to
a fault.
SOTF protection is enabled if the following conditions are met.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1. The BC/BS CB status is in open position
2. BC/BS three phase-currents are smaller than 0.04In.
3. Any of the two connected busbars is out of service.
If any of the following conditions is met, SOTF protection will be disabled after 300ms
1. The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
2. BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04In to being larger than 0.04In.
3. Both connected busbars are in service.
If FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up in the duration when SOTF protection is
enabled, BC/BS SOTF protection will operate to trip BC/BS breaker without controlled by voltage
controlled element.
50SOTF
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.BI_52a
@BCy.BI_52b
@BCy.BI_A_52a
@BCy.BI_B_52a
@BCy.BI_C_52a
@BCy.BI_A_52b
@BCy.BI_B_52b
@BCy.BI_C_52b
50SOTF.BI_Blk
50SOTF.BI_En or @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
3.8.4 Logic
The logic of BC/BS SOTF protection is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an
example).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG Breaker of BC1 is open

0 300ms
& &
SIG BB2 is in service &
&
SIG Ia_BC1>0.04In
& @BC1.50SOTF.Op_Trp
SIG Ib_BC1>0.04In ≥1
SIG Ic_BC1>0.04In
SIG @BC1.50SOTF is enabled
SET Ia_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
& @BC1.50SOTF.FD
SET Ib_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BC1>[50SOTF.I_Set]
Figure 3.8-1 Logic of SOTF protection
Where:
@BC1.50SOTF.FD: FD element for BC/BS SOTF protection picks up
BBx is in service: Please refer to Figure 3.14-1.
@BC1.50SOTF is enabled: SOTF protection of BC1 is enabled (the corresponding enabling

binary input ([50SOTF.BI_En] or [@BC1.50SOTF.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50SOTF.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function
link ([50SOTF.Link] or [@BC1.50SOTF.Link]) and logic setting ([50SOTF.En] or
[@BC1.50SOTF.En]) are set as “1”).
3.8.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.8-1 Input signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when

the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
1 50SOTF.BI_En
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
2 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
3 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
4 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Table 3.8-2 Output signals of BC/BS SOTF protection
1 @BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BCy operates
2 @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of BSz operates
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BCy

3 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
picks up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for SOTF protection of BSz

4 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp
3.8.6 Settings
 Switch-onto-fault Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsSOTF Settings
Table 3.8-3 Switch-onto-fault protection settings
1 50SOTF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS SOTF protection
Logic setting of SOTF protection of bay n

(only for BC/BS bay), it is configured when
the basic information configuration “Logic
setting of a protective element is
configured according to each bay” is set as
2 Bayn.50SOTF.En 0,1 1
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only
for BC/BS bay)
Logic setting of BC/BS SOTF protection, it

is configured when the basic information
configuration “Logic setting of a protective
element is configured according to each
3 50SOTF.En 0,1 1
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling BC/BS SOTF protection
0: Disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
 Function Link

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.8-4 Function links of BC/BS SOTF protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured

when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to each
1 50SOTF.Link
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS

bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
2 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
For BC/BS SOTF protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.9 Overcurrent (OC) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.9, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
PCS-915 provides two independent FD elements for OC protection of each bay (includes BC/BS
and each feeder), which are phase overcurrent FD element and ground overcurrent FD element. If
any of the two elements picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait
for the tripping signal from OC protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for
500ms after the corresponding fault detector element drop off.
 Phase overcurrent FD element
When any phase current of bay n is larger than the threshold, phase overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51P.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:
Max(Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn) > [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
 Ground overcurrent FD element
When residual current of bay n is larger than the threshold, ground overcurrent FD element
(@Bayn.50/51G.FD) picks up, the operating criterion is:

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3I0_Bayn > [Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
Overcurrent protection (50/51) includes phase overcurrent element (50/51P) and ground
overcurrent element (50/51G), if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/
[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is released, each overcurrent element can be configured as
inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) or definite-time overcurrent protection by the setting
[Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/ [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] (0: definite-time characteristic, 1: normal
inverse-time characteristic, 2: very inverse-time characteristic, 3: extremely inverse-time
characteristic, 4: long-time inverse-time characteristic, 5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic).
For overcurrent protection, the inverse-time characteristic complies with the following formula
(based on IEC60255-3 standard).
Kt
t(I )  TMS
I
( )  1
Ib
Where:
Ib is current setting. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting
[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]. For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.I_Set].
K t is time constant. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.K]. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.K]. When inverse-time characteristic is

chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to
the application.
TMS is time multiplier. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.TMS].
For phase overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.TMS].
 is exponent. For ground overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]. For phase
overcurrent protection, it is the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]. when inverse-time characteristic is
chosen as “user-defined inverse-time characteristic”, user has to input the setting according to the
application.
I for ground overcurrent protection, it is actual value of calculated residual current of bay n. For
phase overcurrent protection, it is actual value of measured maximum phase current of bay n.
t (I ) is calculated operating time of inverse-time overcurrent protection.
For phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent protection, definite-time, four IEC
inverse-time characteristics and one user-defined inverse-time characteristic are available for
selection. It can be shown in the following table.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve
Kt 
(Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve)
0: definite-time characteristic - -
1: normal inverse-time characteristic 0.14 0.02
2: very inverse-time characteristic 13.5 1
3: extremely inverse-time characteristic 80 2
4: long-time inverse-time characteristic 120 1
Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic
(Bayn.50/51G.K) (Bayn.50/51G.Alpha)
50/51
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp

@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
50/51.BI_Blk
@Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
50/51.BI_En or (@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
@Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
and @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En)
3.9.4 Logic
The logic of overcurrent protection is shown as bellow.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
&
@Bayn.50/51P.FD
≥1
SET [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]=0
[Bayn.50/51P.t_Op] 0
&
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
& ≥1
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
&
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51P.I_Set]
≥1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp
IDMT (Ia_Bayn)
SIG Bayn.50/51P is enabled &
&
[Bayn.50/51P.tmin] 0
IDMT (Ib_Bayn)
&
& ≥1
IDMT (Ic_Bayn)
&
&
& [Bayn.50/51G.t_Op] 0
SIG Bayn.50/51G is enabled
≥1 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set]
& IDMT (3I0_Bayn)
SET [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]=0 &

[Bayn.50/51G.tmin] 0
& @Bayn.50/51G.FD
Figure 3.9-1 Logic of overcurrent protection
Where:
Bayn.50/51P.FD: Bay n phase overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51G.FD: Bay n ground overcurrent FD element picks up
Bayn.50/51P is enabled: phase overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding

enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51P.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51P.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51P.En]) are set as
“1”).
Bayn.50/51G is enabled: ground overcurrent protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding

enabling binary input ([50/51.BI_En] or [@Bayn.50/51G.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding
disabling binary input [50/51.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
([50/51.Link] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Link]) and logic setting ([50/51.En] or [Bayn.50/51G.En]) are set

as “1”).
3.9.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.9-1 Input signals of overcurrent protection
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of
1 50/51.BI_En
a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

2 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

3 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
4 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection
Table 3.9-2 Output signals of overcurrent protection
1 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
2 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that phase overcurrent FD element of bay n

3 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp
Alarm signal indicating that ground overcurrent FD element of bay n

4 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp
3.9.6 Settings
 Overcurrent Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsOC Settings
Table 3.9-3 Overcurrent protection settings
Current setting for phase overcurrent

1 Bayn.50/51P.I_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
Current setting for ground overcurrent

2 Bayn.50/51G.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection of bay n
3 Bayn.50/51P.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Definite time delay setting for phase

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
overcurrent protection of bay n
Definite time delay setting for ground

4 Bayn.50/51G.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
overcurrent protection of bay n
Operating characteristic selection for phase

overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting
is displayed if “IDMT overcurrent
5 Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
characteristic” in protective function
configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time phase

6 Bayn.50/51P.tmin 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
Section 3.4).
Time constant for inverse-time phase

7 Bayn.50/51P.K 0~10000 0.01
Section 3.4).
Time multiplier for inverse-time phase

8 Bayn.50/51P.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
Exponent for inverse-time phase overcurrent

protection of bay n. This setting is displayed
9 Bayn.50/51P.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01 if “IDMT overcurrent characteristic” in
protective function configuration is set as
“Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Operating characteristic selection for ground

10 Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0~5 1
Section 3.4).
Minimum time delay for inverse-time ground

11 Bayn.50/51G.tmin 0.00~10.00s 0.01s overcurrent protection of bay n. This setting

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Section 3.4).
Time constant for inverse-time ground

12 Bayn.50/51G.K 0~10000 0.01
Section 3.4).
Time multiplier for inverse-time ground

13 Bayn.50/51G.TMS 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
Exponent for inverse-time ground

14 Bayn.50/51G.Alpha 0.01~200 0.01
Section 3.4).
1: Enabling overcurrent protection operates

to initiate BFP
15 50/51.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling overcurrent protection operates
to initiate BFP
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection

and ground overcurrent protection, it is
configured when the basic information
element is configured according to each bay”
16 50/51.En 0,1 1
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and
ground overcurrent protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection
and ground overcurrent protection
Logic setting of phase overcurrent protection

of bay n, it is configured when the basic
information configuration “Logic setting of a
17 Bayn.50/51P.En 0,1 1 protective element is configured according to
each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4)
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of
bay n
Logic setting of ground overcurrent

protection of bay n, it is configured when the
basic information configuration “Logic setting
of a protective element is configured
according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
18 Bayn.50/51G.En 0,1 1
(refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of
bay n
In: Rated secondary current of reference CT
1. [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve Kt 
0: definite-time - -
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51P.K Bayn.50/51P.Alpha
2. [Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve]
The parameters of each characteristic are listed in the following table.
Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve Kt 
0: definite-time - -
5: user-defined inverse-time characteristic Bayn.50/51G.K Bayn.50/51G.Alpha
3. [Bayn.50/51P.tmin]/[Bayn.50/51G.tmin]

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
This is the minimum delay of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.

Recommended value: 0.1s.
4. [Bayn.50/51P.TMS]/[Bayn.50/51G.TMS]
This is the time multiplier setting ( TMS ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection coordinates with a line, the setting should be
graded with the inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection of the line.
If inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection is used independently, it can be set according
to the actual requirement.
5. [Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K], [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha]
[Bayn.50/51P.K]/[Bayn.50/51G.K] and [Bayn.50/51P.Alpha]/[Bayn.50/51G.Alpha] are respectively
the time constant ( K t ) and the exponent (  ) of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection,
which are set according to the model of inverse-time phase/ground overcurrent protection. They
are valid only when the setting [Bayn.50/51P.Opt_Curve]/[Bayn.50/51G.Opt_Curve] is set as “5”
(i.e. user-defined inverse-time characteristic is selected).
 Function Link
Table 3.9-4 Function links of overcurrent protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground

overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a
1 50/51.Link “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it

is configured when the basic information configuration “Enabling
2 @Bayn.50/51P.Link
according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it

3 @Bayn.50/51G.Link binary input and function link of a protective element is configured
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
No. Symbol Remark
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
For overcurrent protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.10 Pole Disagreement (PD) Protection

NOTICE!
settings.
PCS-915 provides independent pole disagreement FD element for PD protection of each bay
(includes BC/BS and each feeder). If pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized, FD element for PD protection of bay n (@Bayn.62PD.FD)
picks up, the positive supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal
from PD protection element. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault
detector element drop off.
For each bay, PD protection is necessary when pole disagreement of corresponding breaker is
detected due to three phases not in same status.
Pole disagreement protection is initiated by series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker

i.e. the binary input [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD].
In addition to series-parallel connected auxiliary contacts of breaker, residual and negative

sequence current are used as auxiliary criteria.
62PD
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp

@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp
62PD.BI_En or @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
62PD.BI_Blk
3.10.4 Logic
The logic of pole disagreement protection is shown as follows.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BI [@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set] &

[@Bayn.62PD.t_Op] 0
≥1 & @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]
SIG Bayn.62PD is enabled

& @Bayn.62PD.FD
52b_A 52a_A
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD]
52b_B 52a_B
52b_C 52a_C
Figure 3.10-1 Logic of pole disagreement protection
Where:
@Bayn.62PD.FD: FD element for PD protection of bay n picks up.
3I0_Bayn, I2_Bayn: residual and negative sequence current of bay n.
Bayn.62PD is enabled: PD protection of bay n is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
([62PD.BI_En] or [@Bayn.62PD.BI_En]) is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input
[62PD.BI_Blk] is de-energized and the corresponding enabling function link ([62PD.Link] or
[@Bayn.62PD.Link]) and logic setting ([62PD.En] or [Bayn.62PD.En]) are set as “1”).
3.10.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.10-1 Input signals of pole disagreement protection
1 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
Binary input of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic

2 62PD.BI_En
Binary input of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function link
3 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as
4 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling PD protection

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.10-2 Output signals of pole disagreement protection
1 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp PD protection of bay n operates
Alarm signal indicating that PD protection FD element of bay n picks up

2 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement binary input of bay n
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for over 10s)
3.10.6 Settings
 Protection Settings
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsPD Settings
Table 3.10-3 PD protection settings
1 Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A Residual current setting for PD protection
Negative-sequence current setting for PD

2 Bayn.62PD.I2_Set 0.05In~20.00In 0.01A
protection
3 Bayn.62PD.t_Op 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of PD protection
Logic setting of PD protection of bay n, it is

configured when the basic information
4 Bayn.62PD.En 0, 1 1 element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection of bay n
0: Disabling PD protection of bay n
Logic setting of PD protection, it is configured

when the basic information configuration
“Logic setting of a protective element is
5 62PD.En 0, 1 1 configured according to each bay” is set as
“Disable” (refer to Section 3.4)
1: Enabling PD protection
0: Disabling PD protection
1: Enabling PD protection operates to initiate

BFP
6 62PD.En_Init50BF 0,1 1
0: Disabling PD protection operates to initiate
BFP
1. [Bayn.62PD.3I0_Set]
It should be larger than maximum residual current under maximum fault level condition.
2. [Bayn.62PD.I2_Set]

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
It should be greater than maximum unbalance negative sequence current under maximum fault
level condition.
3. [Bayn.62PD.t_Op]
It should be greater than maximum inconsistent time of three phase interrupters when breaker is in
the process of being closed.
 Function Link
Table 3.10-4 Function links of pole disagreement protection
No. Symbol Remark
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the

basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and
function link of a protective element is configured according to
1 62PD.Link
each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured

when the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input
and function link of a protective element is configured according
2 @Bayn.62PD.Link
to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
For pole disagreement protection, the relation is “AND” among the enabling function link, the
3.11 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
In Section 3.11, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.
For a bus coupler bay, “@BCy” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bus
coupler. For a bus section bay, “@BSz” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bus section.
PCS-915 provides independent FD element for BC/BS BFP, if any of the following conditions is
fulfilled, FD element for BC/BS BFP (@BCy.50BF.FD or @BSz.50BF.FD) picks up, the positive
supply to the output relays is then available and wait for the tripping signal from BC/BS BFP. The

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after the fault detector element drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip BC/BS
2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary inputs [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] and common BFI
binary input [@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] are energized at the same time
3. BC/BS overcurrent protection operates (controlled by the logic setting [50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. BC/BS pole disagreement protection operates (controlled by the logic setting

[62PD.En_Init50BF])
BFI binary input [@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] can be connected to an external tripping contact.

[@BCy.BI_ChkBFI]/[@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] is a common BFI binary input, it will be energized if
[@BCy.BI_BFI]/[@BSz.BI_BFI] is energized.
When tripping signal has been delivered to BC/BS breaker, while the breaker is failed to open
checked by the BC/BS current check element setting [BC.50BF.I_Set], BFP will operate to trip all
feeders connected to the two busbars (connected with the faulty BC/BS) after time delay of
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]. BC/BS breaker failure protection is controlled by voltage controlled element of
BBP (Please refer to Section 3.5.2.2) if busbar voltage is available and applied.
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, BS breaker failure initiating (BFI) logic is applied and it can output a contact to energize the
breaker failure initiating binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example, for PCS-915-A, if differential element of BB1 operates
and BS current of any phase is larger than 0.04In, the BS breaker failure initiating contact will
operate and it can energize the binary inputs [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of
PCS-915-B.
Ia_BS1>0.04In
Ib_BS1>0.04In ≥1
Ic_BS1>0.04In
& @BS1.BO_BFI
Diff_BB1
Figure 3.11-1 The logic scheme of BFI of BS
Where:
[@BSz.BO_BFI]: BS1 breaker failure initiating contact operates, it can be used to energize the
binary input [@BSz.BI_BFI] and [@BSz.BI_ChkBFI] of another PCS-915.
Ia_BS1: Phase A current of BS1.
Ib_BS1: Phase B current of BS1.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Ic_BS1: Phase C current of BS1.
Diff_BB1: Differential element of BB1 (not controlled by VEC_BBP) operates, please refer to
Figure 3.5-5.
The logic scheme of BFI of BS2 is similar to it.
BC/BS 50BF
@BCy.BI_BFI @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@BCy.BI_ChkBFI 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
87B.Op_Trp@BCy
@BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
@BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp BO_BFI_@BSz
@BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp
50BF.Op
@BCy.62PD.Op_Trp
3.11.4 Logic
The logic of BC BFP is shown as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SET Ia_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET Ib_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BC1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BC1
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BC1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BC1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
@BC1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BI [@BC1.BI_BFI] ≥1
& [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB2
BI [@BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
@BC1.50BF.FD
Figure 3.11-2 Logic of BC/BS BFP
Where:
@BC1.50BF.FD: FD element for BC1 BFP picks up

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

@BC1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BC1

operates ([@BC1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BC1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
For the occasion that BS is at the edge of the protected zone, such as BS1 and BS2 in Figure
3.2-9, the logic of BS BFP is shown as follows (Takes BS1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SET Ia_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SET Ib_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set] ≥1
SET Ic_BS1>[BC.50BF.I_Set]
SIG 87B.Op_Trp@BS1
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF]
&
SIG @BS1.62PD.Op_Trp
@BS1.50BF.Op_TrpBB
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
& 50BF.Op_Trp@BB1
&
SIG @BS1.50/51.Op_Trp
&
BI [@BS1.BI_BFI] ≥1
&
@BS1.50BF.FD
BI [@BS1.BI_ChkBFI]
Figure 3.11-3 Logic of BS BFP (BS is at the edge of the protected zone)
Where:
@BS1.50BF.FD: FD element for BS1 BFP picks up

@BS1.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of BSz

operates ([@BS1.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@BS1.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
3.11.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.11-1 Input signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection
3 @BCy.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BCy operates
4 @BCy.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BCy operates

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
5 @BSz.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of BSz operates
6 @BSz.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of BSz operates
7 @BCy.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BCy operates
8 @BSz.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of BSz operates
9 @BCy.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BCy
10 @BCy.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BCy
11 @BSz.BI_BFI BFI binary input of BSz
12 @BSz.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of BSz
Table 3.11-2 Output signals of BC/BS breaker failure protection
1 @BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB BCy BFP operates to trip busbar zone
2 @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB BSz BFP operates to trip busbar zone
3 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx
4 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP (@BCy.BI_BFI) is energized for over

5 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP (@BSz.BI_BFI) is energized for over

6 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI
10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of BCy (@BCy.BI_ChkBFI) is

7 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s
The common initiating contact of BFP of BSz (@BSz.BI_ChkBFI) is

8 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
continually energized for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BCy BFP picks up for over
9 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BSz BFP picks up for over
10 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp
10s
11 @BSz.BO_BFI BSz breaker failure initiating contact operates
3.11.6 Settings
 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsBC BFP Settings
Table 3.11-3 BC/BS breaker failure protection settings
1 BC.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A Current setting for BC/BS BFP
2 BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.00~10.00s 0.01s Time delay of BC/BS BFP

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
1. [BC.50BF.I_Set]
It should be set as minimum fault current flowing through BC breaker. The change of power
system topology can influence the fault current after BBP operating.
2. [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB]
It should be larger than the maximal arc-extinguishing time of BC breaker.
3.12 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

NOTICE!
settings.
In Section 3.12, for a feeder bay, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding feeder bay.
Feeder breaker failure protection is provided for each feeder bay. PCS-915 provides independent
FD element for feeder BFP, if any of the following conditions is fulfilled, FD element for feeder bay
n BFP picks up (@Bayn.50BF.FD), the positive supply to the output relays is then available and
wait for the tripping signal from feeder BFP. The fault detector output signal will last for 500ms after
the fault detector element drop off.
1. BBP operates to trip feeder bay n (controlled by the logic setting [87B.En_Init50BF])
2. Breaker failure initiating (BFI) binary input (Phase-segregated or three-phase tripping contact)
and common BFI binary input [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] of feeder bay n are energized.
3. Overcurrent protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting

[50/51.En_Init50BF])
4. Pole disagreement protection of feeder bay n operates (controlled by the logic setting
[62PD.En_Init50BF])
Breaker failure protection is available for each feeder bay. When a breaker is determined failure to
trip, the BFP will operate to re-trip the breaker after time delay of [50BF.t_ReTrp] (If “Breaker
failure protection re-tripping function” in protective function configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4) and the logic setting [50BF.En_ReTrp] is set as “1”). If the fault is still existed, the
breaker failure protection will trip BC after time delay of [50BF.t_TrpBC] and all feeders after time
delay of [50BF.t_TrpBB]. BFP also provides the function to transfer trip the breaker of the remote
end of a line or intertrip the breakers on other sides of a main-transformer with the time delay of
[50BF.t_TrpBB].

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.12.2.1 BFI Binary Input
For each feeder bay, BFP can be initiated externally via binary inputs by phase-segregated
tripping contacts or three-phase tripping contacts of protective device for the corresponding feeder
bay.
1. Phase-segregated tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase A of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase B of feeder bay n
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of phase C of feeder bay n
2. Three-phase tripping contact
[@Bayn.BI_BFI]: The binary input for initiating BFP of three phases of feeder bay n.
For a main-transformer bay, only three-phase breaker failure initiating (BFI) contact is provided.
3.12.2.2 Configuration of BFI Binary Input
If any BFI binary input (of BC/BS or any feeder bay) is configured for a binary input (BI) module,
binary inputs for other functions can not be configured for the BI module. BFI binary inputs of the
same bay must be configured for one BI module (i.e. [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],
[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI] can not be configured for two or more BI module).
[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] is the common BFI binary input. When users
configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary software by themselves, all the common BFI
binary inputs of related bays must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI
binary input of a BI module is energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are
energized (refer to Section 9.5.2.1).
For example, if BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 ([@Bayn.BI_A_BFI], [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI],

[@Bayn.BI_C_BFI] and [@Bayn.BI_BFI], n=02~06) are configured for one BI module, all the
common BFI binary inputs of related bays ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06)) must be configured to
[BI_COMMON] of the BI module, then if any BFI binary input of the BI module is energized, the
common BFI binary inputs of bay 02~06 [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] (n=02~06) will be energized.
3.12.2.3 Current Criterion
1. Current criterion 1
Phase current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
Residual current is greater than the setting [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
Negative sequence current is greater than the setting i.e. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
All these current criteria are controlled by the logic setting [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl], if this logic
setting is set as “0”, it can be regarded as that all these current criteria are met.
Current criterion 2 and current criterion 3 are also controlled by the logic setting of
[Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] and [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] respectively.
NOTICE!
When calculating all the current setting of each bay, the primary current should be
converted to the secondary value according to the reference CT ratio instead of the
actual CT ratio of each bay.
3.12.2.4 Voltage Control Element of Breaker Failure Protection (VCE_BFP)
Voltage control element is used as an auxiliary condition.
The criteria are:
UP≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-1
3U0≥[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] Equation 3.12-2
U2≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-3
Where:
UP: Phase voltage
3U0: Residual voltage
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]: Residual voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative sequence voltage setting for blocking BFP
When the protective device is applied to an unearthed system, i.e. the system setting
[Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, the criteria of voltage control element will change.
UPP ≤[50BF.VCE.U_Set] Equation 3.12-4
U2 ≥[50BF.VCE.U2_Set] Equation 3.12-5
Where:
UPP: Phase-to-phase voltage

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[50BF.VCE.U_Set]: Phase-to-phase voltage setting for blocking BFP
[50BF.VCE.U2_Set]: Negative voltage setting for blocking BFP
VCE_BFP will be controlled by the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En], if it is set as “0”, VCE_BFP will be
disabled and feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by VCE_BFP
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), VCE_BFP will quit and related settings will be hidden,
feeder breaker failure protection will not controlled by voltage element.
If the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “0” (refer to Section 7.1), VCE_BFP is invalid no matter
the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1” or not, feeder breaker failure protection will not
controlled by voltage element.
Only if “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3), the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is set as “1” and the logic
setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “1”, VCE_BFP is enabled.
If the protective function configuration “Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4), then if the logic setting
[Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] is set as “1” and the releasing voltage controlled element binary input
[50BF.BI_RlsVCE] is energized, the voltage controlled element for breaker failure protection for
bay n will operate.
Feeder 50BF
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp

Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBCy
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BBx 50BF.Op_@TrpBSz
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BBx @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
@Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp @Bayn.Op_TT
@Bayn.BI_BFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI
@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
@Bayn.BI_A_BFI 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
@Bayn.BI_B_BFI 50BF.Alm_Pkp
@Bayn.BI_C_BFI 50BF.Alm_Off
50BF.BI_RlsVCE 50BF.Op
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased
87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC
50BF.BI_En
50BF.BI_Blk

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.12.4 Logic
The logic of feeder BFP is shown as follows.
EN [87B.En_Init50BF] &
SIG BBP operates to trip bay n
EN [62PD.En_Init50BF] &
SIG @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp
EN [50/51.En_Init50BF] >=1
&
SIG @Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp
BI [@Bayn.BI_BFI] &
BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]
&
>=1 >=1
SET Ia_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI] &
BI [@Bayn.BI_A_BFI]
SET Ib_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_B_BFI]
SET Ic_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I_Set] &

BI [@Bayn.BI_C_BFI]
EN [50BF.En_Current_Ctrl] & >=1
>=1
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0] & >=1
SET 3I0_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]
&
EN [Bayn.50BF.En_I2] &
SET I2_Bayn>[Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
& @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
@Bayn.50BF.FD @Bayn.Op_TT
& [50BF.t_TrpBB] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx
&
SIG 50BF is enabled [50BF.t_TrpBC] 0 50BF.Op_Trp@BC
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC
SIG VCE_BFP x
&
SIG VCE_BFP is disabled ≥1 [50BF.t_ReTrp] 0 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp
BI [50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
&
&
EN Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE
SIG Disconnector position of BBx
EN [50BF.En_ReTrp]
Figure 3.12-1 Logic of feeder BFP
Where:
@Bayn.50/51.Op_Trp: Phase overcurrent protection or ground overcurrent protection of bay n

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
operates ([@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp] or [@Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp]).
50BF is enabled: busbar differential protection is enabled (the corresponding enabling binary input
[50BF.BI_En] is energized, the corresponding disabling binary input [50BF.BI_Blk] is de-energized
and the corresponding enabling function link [50BF.Link] and logic setting [50BF.En] are set as
“1”).
VCE_BFP x: Voltage controlled element for BFP of any connected BBx, please refer to Section
3.12.2.4.
VCE_BFP is disabled: “B: Without voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned
Functions” during MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) or the device setting [En_Volt_BB] is
set as “0” or the logic setting [50BF.VCE.En] is set as “0”.
Disconnector position of BBx: which busbar the bay is connected to (according to disconnector
position of the bay).
@Bayn.50BF.FD: FD element for feeder bay n BFP picks up.
3I0_Bayn: The residual current of bay n.
I2_Bayn: The negative sequence current of bay n.
Ia_Bayn: The phase A current of bay n.
Ib_Bayn: The phase B current of bay n.
Ic_Bayn: The phase C current of bay n.
3.12.5 I/O Signal
Table 3.12-1 Input signals of feeder breaker failure protection
1 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder BFP
2 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder BFP
3 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates
4 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates
5 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates
6 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase BFI binary input of bay n
7 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A BFI binary input of bay n
8 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B BFI binary input of bay n
9 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C BFI binary input of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common BFI binary input of bay n
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

11 50BF.BI_RlsVCE
failure protection

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Table 3.12-2 Output signals of feeder breaker failure protection
1 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp BFP of bay n operates to re-trip the feeder breaker
2 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy BFP operates to trip BCy breaker
3 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz BFP operates to trip BSz breaker
4 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx BFP operates to trip BBx
5 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB BFP of bay n operates to trip busbar zone
6 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC BFP of bay n operates to trip BC/BS
7 50BF.Op BC/BS BFP or feeder BFP operates
DZP or BFP of bay n operates to initiate transfer trip to remote

8 @Bayn.Op_TT
circuit breaker
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP of bay n

9 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI (BI_A_BFI_@Bayn, BI_B_BFI_@Bayn, BI_C_BFI_@Bayn or
BI_BFI_@Bayn) is energized for over 10s.
The common initiating contact of BFP of bay n

10 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI
(@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI) is continually energized for over 10s
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker

11 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE
failure protection is energized for over 10s.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element for BFP of any bay picks
12 50BF.Alm_Pkp
up for over 10s
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled. If the logic setting

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once feeder BFP is disabled
13 50BF.Alm_Off (feeder BFP can be disabled by the corresponding enabling
binary input, function link or enabling logic setting), the alarm
signal indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be issued
3.12.6 Settings
 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection Setting
Access path: MainMenuSettingsProt SettingsFdr BFP Settings
Table 3.12-3 Feeder breaker failure protection settings
Time delay of feeder BFP operating

1 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to re-trip breaker

2 50BF.t_TrpBC 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to trip BC breaker

3 50BF.t_TrpBB 0.00~10.00s 0.01s
to trip busbar zone
4 50BF.VCE.U_Set 0~Un 0.01V Under voltage setting of VCE of

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BFP
Residual voltage setting of VCE of

5 50BF.VCE.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.01V
BFP
Negative-sequence voltage setting

6 50BF.VCE.U2_Set 0~Un 0.01V
of VCE of BFP
Phase current setting of BFP of bay

7 Bayn.50BF.I_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
n
Residual current setting of BFP of

8 Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
bay n
Negative sequence current setting

9 Bayn.50BF.I2_Set 0.05In ~20.00In 0.01A
of BFP of bay n
Residual current criterion of BFP of

10 Bayn.50BF.En_3I0 0, 1 1
bay n is enabled or not
Negative sequence current criterion

11 Bayn.50BF.En_I2 0, 1 1
of BFP of bay n is enabled or not
1: the binary input of releasing

voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is enabled
12 Bayn.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE 0, 1 1 0: the binary input of releasing
voltage controlled element for
breaker failure protection is
disabled
Logic setting of breaker failure

protection
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure
13 50BF.En 0, 1 1
protection
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure
protection
1: Alarm signal will be issued if

feeder BFP is disabled
14 50BF.En_Alm_Off 0,1 1
0: Alarm signal will not be issued if
feeder BFP is disabled
Current criterion of BFP is enabled

15 50BF.En_Current_Ctrl 0, 1 1
or not
1: Enabling re-tripping function for

feeder breaker failure protection
16 50BF.En_ReTrp 0,1 1
0: Disabling re-tripping function for
feeder breaker failure protection
1: BFP is controlled by VCE of BFP

17 50BF.VCE.En 0, 1 1
0: BFP is not controlled by VCE of

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
BFP
1. [50BF.t_ReTrp]
It should be larger than 100ms and smaller than the setting [50BF.t_TrpBC]. The recommended
value is 0.15s. The function of re-tripping target breaker can be disabled if it is set the same as
[50BF.t_TrpBC].
2. [50BF.t_TrpBC]
It should be larger than the sum of operating time of breaker and reset time of protective device
with certain margin. The recommended value is 250ms~350ms.
3. [50BF.t_TrpBB]
On the premise that BC breaker is tripped, the value of [50BF.t_TrpBB] should be greater than the
sum of operating time of BC breaker and reset time of protective device with certain margin. It
should be as short as possible on the premise of losing selectivity. The recommended value is
500ms~600ms.
4. [50BF.VCE.U_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when a symmetrical fault occurs at the remote
end of the longest feeder but not operate in the lowest operation voltage. After the fault is cleared,
the protective device can reset reliably. If the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as
“1”, the setting should be set as phase-to-phase voltage. Please refer to Section “System Settings
in Chapter 7
5. [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum residual voltage in normal
operation mode. It is invalid if the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”.
6. [50BF.VCE.U2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when an unsymmetrical fault occurs at the
remote end of the longest line. It should be larger than maximum negative sequence voltage in
normal operation mode.
7. [Bayn.50BF.I_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a fault occurring at the remote end
of feeder or in LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater than
maximum load under maximum fault level condition. In case of complying maximum load current
will not meet the sensitivity requirement, sensitivity requirement has the priority.
8. [Bayn.50BF.3I0_Set]

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is an earth fault occurring at the
remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be greater
than the maximum residual current in normal operation mode.
9. [Bayn.50BF.I2_Set]
It should make BFP sensitive enough to operate when there is a phase-to-phase fault occurring at
the remote end of line or LV side of transformer if this feeder is transformer bay. It should be
greater than the maximum negative sequence current in normal operation mode.
10. [Bayn.50BF.En_3I0]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
11. [Bayn.50BF.En_I2]
In order to improve the sensitivity of current criterion for asymmetric fault, this setting should be set
as “1”. Especially for transformer or transmission line adopting phase-segregated tripping logic.
 Function Link
Table 3.12-4 Function links of feeder breaker failure protection
No. Symbol Remark
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

1 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
For feeder breaker failure protection, the relation is “AND” among the function link [50BF.Link], the
corresponding enabling binary input [50BF.BI_En] and the corresponding logic setting [50BF.En].
3.13 CT Circuit Supervision

3.13.1.1 CT Circuit Failure
1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS], CT
circuit failure alarm of corresponding phase [AlmH_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be issued and
BBP of corresponding phase will be blocked (if the logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as
“1”) with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the
alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically
after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to normal condition.
2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and both discriminating zone differential currents of

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
the phase of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP will not be blocked, but the inter-connected
operation mode will be enabled automatically. Under this situation, if any internal fault occurs
on any of the two connected busbars, the device will not identify the faulty busbar. If the logic
setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically after
the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing the resetting
binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT”
are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition.
3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmH_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
failure alarm signal of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s and BBP of the busbar (of which the discriminating zone
differential current of the phase is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS]) of corresponding phase will be
blocked.
When “A: With voltage concerned functions” is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during
MOT configuration (refer to Section 3.3) and VT circuit failure is not detected, CT circuit
supervision will cease if VCE of any busbar operates. If “B: Without voltage concerned functions”
is selected for “Voltage Concerned Functions” during MOT configuration, CT circuit supervision will
not be affected by voltage.
3.13.1.2 CT Circuit Abnormality
1. If the check zone differential current of one phase is larger than the setting i.e. [I_AlmL_CTS],
CT circuit abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [AlmL_CTS_X] (X=A, B or C) will be
issued with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset
automatically after the CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by energizing
the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously
(“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the CT circuit returns to
normal condition.
2. For the BC/BS that only one CT is available, if the check zone differential current of one phase
is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and both discriminating zone currents of the phase
of the two connected busbars are larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BC/BS CT circuit abnormality
alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will be issued
with a time delay of 5s. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, BC/BS
CT circuit abnormality can be reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal
condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
reset automatically after the BC/BS CT circuit returns to normal condition, it can be reset only
by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the BC/BS
CT circuit returns to normal condition.
3. For the BC/BS that double CTs are available, if the check zone differential current of one
phase is smaller than the setting [I_AlmL_CTS] and discriminating zone differential current of
the phase of any connected busbar is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], if the discriminating zone
differential current equals to the difference of current between the two CTs, BC/BS CT circuit
abnormality alarm of corresponding phase [@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X]/[@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X] will
be issued with a time delay of 5s.
4. BBP will not be blocked when CT circuit is abnormal.
3.13.1.3 Discriminating Zone Differential Current High/Low Value Alarm (When Double CTs
are Available for BC/BS)
1. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmL_CTS], BBx differential
current low value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmL_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s. If the
logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “1”, the alarm can be reset automatically
after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition. If the logic setting
[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be reset automatically after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition, it can be reset only by
energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or pressing “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the front of the device) after the
discriminating zone differential current returns to normal condition.
2. If discriminating zone differential current of BBx is larger than [I_AlmH_CTS], BBx differential
current high value alarm signal [@BBx.AlmH_Diff] will be issued with a time delay of 5s and
discriminating zone differential circuit of BBx will be blocked (if the logic setting
[87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”). If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “1”,
the alarm can be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns
to normal condition. If the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS] is set as “0”, the alarm
can not be reset automatically after the discriminating zone differential current returns to
normal condition, it can be reset by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or
pressing “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously (“ESC” and “ENT” are two keypads on the
front of the device) after the discriminating zone differential current returns to normal
condition.
NOTICE!
Logic execution priority: check zone CT circuit failure alarm logic > single-CT BC/BS CT
circuit failure alarm to enable inter-connected operation mode logic > discriminating
zone differential current high value alarm logic.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
CTS
AlmH_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmH_CTS_X
AlmL_CTS_X
@BCy.AlmL_CTS_X
@BBx.AlmH_Diff
@BBx.AlmL_Diff
@BSz.AlmH_CTS_X
@BSz.AlmL_CTS_X
X=A, B or C
3.13.3 Logic
5000ms 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_A
5000ms 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_B
5000ms 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmH_CTS] AlmH_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-1 Logic of CT circuit failure
Where:
Ida_CZ: Phase-A check zone differential current
Idb_CZ: Phase-B check zone differential current
Idc_CZ: Phase-C check zone differential current
I_AlmH_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit failure
AlmH_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-A will be blocked by it if the
logic setting [87B.En_CTS_Blk] is set as “1”.
AlmH_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-B will be blocked by it if the
AlmH_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit failure alarm signal, BBP of phase-C will be blocked by it if the
When double CTs are available for BC/BS, the following logic will be enabled.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET Ida_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Idb_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS] ≥1 @BBx.AlmH_Diff
SET Idc_BBx>[I_AlmH_CTS]
Figure 3.13-2 Logic of BBx differential current high value alarm
Where:
Ida_BBx: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BBx
Idb_BBx: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BBx
Idc_BBx: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BBx
@BBx.AlmH_Diff: BBx differential current high value alarm signal, individual zones of busbar
differential protection will be blocked by differential current high value alarm of respective zones.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
&
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
&
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmH_CTS] & @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
&
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmH_CTS]
Figure 3.13-3 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:
Ida_BB1: Phase-A discriminative differential current of BB1
Idb_BB1: Phase-B discriminative differential current of BB1
Idc_BB1: Phase-C discriminative differential current of BB1

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit failure.
@BC1.AlmH_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit failure.
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown as
follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_A
≥1
&
SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_B
≥1
&
SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmH_CTS]
&
SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmH_CTS_C
≥1
&
SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣
Figure 3.13-4 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit failure (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
Where:
Ia_BC1_CT1: Phase-A current of CT1 of BC1
Ib_BC1_CT1: Phase-B current of CT1 of BC1
Ic_BC1_CT1: Phase-C current of CT1 of BC1
Ia_BC1_CT2: Phase-A current of CT2 of BC1

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Ib_BC1_CT2: Phase-B current of CT2 of BC1
Ic_BC1_CT2: Phase-C current of CT2 of BC1
5000ms 0
SET Ida_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_A
5000ms 0
SET Idb_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_B
5000ms 0
SET Idc_CZ>[I_AlmL_CTS] AlmL_CTS_C
Figure 3.13-5 Logic of CT circuit abnormality
Where:
I_AlmL_CTS: Current setting of CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_A: Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_B: Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
AlmL_CTS_C: Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-6 as an example).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Ida_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
&
SET Ida_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Idb_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
&
SET Idb_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
5000ms 0
SET Idc_BB1>[I_AlmL_CTS] & @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
&
SET Idc_BB2>[I_AlmL_CTS]
Figure 3.13-6 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that only one CT is available)
Where:
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_A: BC1 phase-A CT circuit abnormality
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_B: BC1 phase-B CT circuit abnormality
@BC1.AlmL_CTS_C: BC1 phase-C CT circuit abnormality
The logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available) is shown
as follows (Takes BC1 in Figure 3.2-9 as an example).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SET Ida_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Ida_BB1=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_A
≥1
&
SIG Ida_BB2=∣Ia_BC1_CT1-Ia_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idb_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Idb_BB1=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_B
≥1
&
SIG Idb_BB2=∣Ib_BC1_CT1-Ib_BC1_CT2∣
SET Idc_CZ<[I_AlmL_CTS]
&
SIG Idc_BB1=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣ 5s 0
& @BC1.AlmL_CTS_C
≥1
&
SIG Idc_BB2=∣Ic_BC1_CT1-Ic_BC1_CT2∣
Figure 3.13-7 Logic of BC/BS CT circuit abnormality (for the BC/BS that double CTs are available)
3.13.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.13-1 Output signal of CT circuit supervision
1 AlmH_CTS CT circuit failure
2 AlmH_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit failure
3 AlmH_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit failure
4 AlmH_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit failure
5 @BCy.AlmH_CTS BCy CT circuit failure
6 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
7 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit failure
8 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
9 @BSz.AlmH_CTS BSz CT circuit failure
10 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
11 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
12 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit failure

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
13 AlmL_CTS CT circuit abnormality
14 AlmL_CTS_A Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
15 AlmL_CTS_B Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
16 AlmL_CTS_C Phase-C CT circuit abnormality
17 @BCy.AlmL_CTS BCy CT circuit abnormality
18 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
19 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
20 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality
21 @BSz.AlmL_CTS BSz CT circuit abnormality
22 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
23 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
24 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
25 @BBx.AlmH_Diff BBx differential current high value alarm
26 @BBx.AlmL_Diff BBx differential current low value alarm
3.14 VT Circuit Supervision

1. If negative sequence voltage (U2) of BBx is larger than 0.04Unn (Unn: secondary rated
phase-to-phase voltage of VT) and fault detector element does not pick up, an alarm
[@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
2. If BBx is in service and the scalar sum of three phase-voltage (|UA|+|UB|+|UC|) of BBx is
smaller than Un (Un: secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage of VT) and fault detector
element does not pick up, an alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be issued with a time delay of
1.25s.
3. When the system setting [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode] is set as “1”, if busbar negative

sequence voltage (U2) is larger than 0.04Unn, or any phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than
0.7Unn, an alarm [Alm_VTS_BB1] or [Alm_VTS_BB2] will be issued with a time delay of 1.25s.
If VT circuit failure is detected, DPFC voltage FD element will be disabled. When the three
phase-voltage returns to normal condition, the alarm [@BBx.Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically
with a time delay of 10s.
If the fault detector element picks up due to a disturbance in the system (DPFC current is
detected), the VT circuit supervision will be disabled for 3s.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
VTS
Ia_Bayn, Ib_Bayn, Ic_Bayn @BBx.Alm_VTS
Ua_BBx, Ub_BBx, Uc_BBx
3.14.3 Logic
SIG Ua>0.7Un
SIG Ub>0.7Un
≥1 BBx is in service
SIG Uc>0.7Un
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In
│ Ua│ +│ Ub│ +│ Uc│ < &

SIG
Un
EN [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
≥1
& 1.25s 10s
& @BBx.Alm_VTS
SIG Uab<0.7Unn
SIG Ubc<0.7Unn ≥1
SIG Uca<0.7Unn
SIG U2>0.04Unn
SIG Any FD element picks up
Figure 3.14-1 Logic of VT circuit failure
Where:
Ua: Phase-A voltage of BBx
Ub: Phase-B voltage of BBx
Uc: Phase-C voltage of BBx
Uab, Ubc, Uca: Phase-to-phase voltage of BBx
U2: Negative-sequence voltage of BBx
Un: The rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage of VT
Unn: The rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT
IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of any feeder bay connected to BBx
In: The rated secondary current of reference CT
Any FD element picks up: Any fault detector element picks up
@BBx.Alm_VTS: BBx VT circuit failure

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.14.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.14-1 Output signal of VT circuit supervision
1 @BBx.Alm_VTS BBx VT circuit failure
3.15 Position of Disconnector and Circuit Breaker

NOTICE!
In Section 3.15, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar
and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding bay.
In a substation with double-busbar layout, feeders may be switched from one busbar to the other
busbar during operation. Thus it is necessary to identify the real time topology of busbar correctly.
PCS-915 offers disconnector positions element and self-diagnosis function to assist in identifying
the real time busbar topology.
If BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same time (n≠m),
an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued simultaneously. If the two disconnectors returns to
normal condition, the alarm will reset automatically.
If an abnormality of disconnector position of bay n is detected, the disconnector position alarm

[@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously in any of the following cases.
1. Current is detected in a feeder but the feeder has no disconnector positions for dual busbars
(the two disconnectors that the feeder connect to the two busbar are open). In this case, the
protective device will use the latest disconnector position instead and its validity will be
checked based on the current distribution of the system.
2. The discriminating zone differential current is larger than 0.08In and the check zone
differential current is smaller than 0.06In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) due
to one feeder of which the disconnector position is wrong, disconnector position alarm will be
issued and the device can identify the correct disconnector position based on the current
distribution of system. The logic diagram is shown in Figure 3.15-3.
If any disconnector position alarm is issued, if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “1”
(refer to Section 3.5.6), once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears, the alarm will be
reset automatically. if the logic setting [En_AutoRecov_DS] is set as “0”, the alarm can not be
reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input [BI_ConfirmDS] or carry out
the disconnector position confirming command by navigating the path “Local Cmd”->“Confirm
Disconnector”.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Besides, in order to prevent the feeder from miss-operation caused by the lost of feeder
disconnector position, regardless which busbar zone does the fault occur in, the feeders of which
current is larger than 0.04*In (In: the rated secondary current of reference CT) but no disconnector
position can be detected will be tripped.
If dual-position BI for disconnector is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally open auxiliary
contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status. If dual-position BI for circuit breaker
is disabled (refer to Section 3.3), only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to
identify the position status. If dual-position BI for disconnector (circuit breaker) is enabled (refer to
Section 3.3), both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of
disconnector (circuit breaker) are used to identify the position status.
If only normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is used to identify the position status,
once normally closed auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
circuit breaker will be identified as open, otherwise it is closed.
If only normally open auxiliary contact of disconnector is used to identify the position status, once
normally open auxiliary contact connected binary input is energized, the corresponding
disconnector will be identified as closed, otherwise it is open.
If both normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector or
circuit breaker are used to identify the position status, the following tables show the principle.
Table 3.15-1 Position status of disconnector
Normally closed auxiliary

Normally open auxiliary contact position status
contact
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
0 0 the last valid memorized position
1 1 Closed
Table 3.15-2 Position status of circuit breaker
Normally closed auxiliary

Normally open auxiliary contact position status
contact
0 1 Open
1 0 Closed
0 0 Closed
1 1 Closed
If normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n circuit breaker is energized but current is still be
detected in corresponding bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_52b] will be issued without blocking
the protective device.
If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”, the
disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2], if

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] is set as “1”, BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly, if

[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] is set as “1”, BB2 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly.
When [@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”, if [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are

set as “1” at the same time, an alarm signal [Alm_IntLink] will be issued.
If the enforced disconnector position link [@Bayn.Link_DS] is configured and it is set as “1”,
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2] are all set as “0”, but current is detected in
bay n, disconnector position alarm [@Bayn.Alm_DS] will be issued simultaneously.
If dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled (refer to Section 3.3), when circuit breaker of bay n
is in maintenance, the corresponding function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] should be set as “1”
and the circuit breaker will be regarded as open, otherwise the alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b] will be issued once circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance. If
dual-position BI for circuit breaker is disabled, the function link [@Bayn.Link_Maintenance] is not
configured.
3.15.2 Logic
3.15.2.1 Inter-connection Mode Alarm Logic
BI @Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1
Bay n is connected to BB1
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
&
& Alm_IntLink1
SIG Dual-position DS
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB2 Bay n is connected to BB2
&
Figure 3.15-1 Logic of inter-connection mode alarm
Where:
@Bayn.BI_89a_@BB1: Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1: Normally closed auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector of bay n
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
configuration via PCS-Explorer software (refer to Section 3.3).
Alm_IntLink1: BB1 disconnector and BB2 disconnector of the same feeder are closed at the same
time

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.15.2.2 Disconnector Position Alarm Logic
SIG Bayn DS position changes

&
EN En_AutoRecov_DS
SIG Bay n is connected to BB1 ≥1 Bayn.Alm_DS

&
SIG Bay n is connected to BB2
&
SIG IΨ_Bayn>0.04In
Figure 3.15-2 Logic of disconnector position alarm
Where:
Bayn DS position changes: Disconnector position of bay n changes (from open change to closed
or from closed change to open)
En_AutoRecov_DS: 1: Logic setting of busbar differential protection. When it is set as “1”, if any
disconnector position alarm is issued, once the abnormality of disconnector position disappears,
the alarm will be reset automatically. When it is set as “0”, if any disconnector position alarm is
issued, the alarm can not be reset unless energizing the disconnector position confirm binary input
[BI_ConfirmDS]
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
IΨ_Bayn: Any phase current of feeder bay n
@Bayn.Alm_DS: Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
3.15.2.3 Disconnector Position Automatic Correction Logic
Takes BB1 as an example

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG Ida_CZ<0.06In
SIG Idb_CZ<0.06In &
SIG Idc_CZ<0.06In
SIG Ida_BB1>0.08In
SIG Idb_BB1>0.08In &
SIG Idc_BB1>0.08In
SIG Ida_BB2<0.08In
≥1 Bay n is identified connected to BB1
SIG Idb_BB2<0.08In &
&
SIG Idc_BB2<0.08In
SIG Ia_Bayn=Ida_BB1
SIG Ib_Bayn=Idb_BB1 &
SIG Ic_Bayn=Idc_BB1

≥1
Figure 3.15-3 Logic of automatic correction of disconnector position
Where:
Ida_BB1 (Ida_BB2): Phase-A discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idb_BB1 (Idb_BB2): Phase-B discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Idc_BB1 (Idc_BB2): Phase-C discriminating zone differential current of BB1 (BB2)
Ia_Bayn: Phase-A current of feeder bay n
Ib_Bayn: Phase-B current of feeder bay n
Ic_Bayn: Phase-C current of feeder bay n
Bay n is connected to BB1, Bay n is connected to BB2: Please refer to the inter-connection mode
alarm logic
3.15.2.4 Dual-Position Alarm Logic
Takes BB1 as an example

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
SIG Dual-position DS
&
& @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BB1
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1 ≥1
&
BI @Bayn.BI_89b_@BB1
SIG Dual-position CB
BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&
BI @Bayn.BI_52b ≥1 & @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
BI @Bayn.BI_52a
&
BI @Bayn.BI_52b
EN @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
Figure 3.15-4 Logic of dual-position alarm
Where:
Dual-position DS: Dual-position for disconnector status, it can be configured during MOT
Dual-position CB: Dual-position for circuit breaker status, it can be configured during MOT
@Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx: Dual-position alarm for BB1 disconnector of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52a: Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
@Bayn.BI_52b: Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n

@Bayn.Link_Maintenance: Logic link to indicate circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance
@Bayn.Alm_52a&52b: Dual-position alarm for circuit breaker of bay n
3.15.3 I/O Signal
Table 3.15-3 Input signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is enabled
3 @Bayn.BI_52a
(refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n. The input
4 @Bayn.BI_52b signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker position” in basic
information configuration is set as “disable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
5 @Bayn.BI_A_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker is
6 @Bayn.BI_B_52a
enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker position”
in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4).
Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay

n. The input signal is only configured if dual-position BI for circuit breaker
7 @Bayn.BI_C_52a is enabled (refer to Section 3.3) and “Phase-segregated breaker
position” in basic information configuration is set as “Enable” (refer to
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n.

The input signal is only configured if “Phase-segregated breaker
8 @Bayn.BI_A_52b
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n.

9 @Bayn.BI_B_52b
Section 3.4).
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n.

10 @Bayn.BI_C_52b
Section 3.4).
11 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
Table 3.15-4 Output signals of position of disconnector and circuit breaker
1 @Bayn.Alm_DS Disconnector position of bay n is abnormal.
2 Alm_DS Disconnector position of any bay is abnormal.
BBn disconnector and BBm disconnector of the same feeder are

3 Alm_IntLink
closed at the same time
4 @Bayn.Alm_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay n breaker is energized but

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
current can still be detected in bay n
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of bay n breaker

are energized or de-energized simultaneously for over 5s (if both
5 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b
normally open auxiliary contact and normally closed auxiliary contact
of circuit breaker are used to identify the position status)
Normally closed and normally open auxiliary contact of BBx

6 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx disconnector of bay n is energized or de-energized simultaneously for
over s 5s
3.15.4 Settings
 Function Link
Table 3.15-5 Function link of circuit breaker
No. Symbol Remark
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance.

1 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance.
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The

disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1]
and [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2].
2 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position
binary input.
1: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as closed enforcedly if

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”.
3 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB1
0: BB1 disconnector of bay n is taken as open enforcedly if

4 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB2
3.16 BC/BS Breaker Substitution and Bypass Breaker Substitution

NOTICE!
In Section 3.16, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of corresponding busbar.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.16.1.1 BC/BS Breaker Substitution
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
binary input [BI_En_BC_Byp] should be energized. The binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized or de-energized according to the busbar arrangement. The polarity mark of feeder
CT is on the busbar side, if the polarity mark of the substituted BC/BS CT is on the busbar side,
the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be de-energized and BC/BS current will be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current. If the polarity mark of the substituting BC/BS
CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized and negative
value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current.
If BC/BS breaker is used temporarily to substitute one of feeder breakers, whether the positive
value or the negative value of the substituting BC/BS current is calculated in discriminating zone
differential current depends on the status of the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp].
If substituting disconnector of BBx [BI_89a_@BBx_Byp] is closed, the BC/BS breaker is

substituting through BBx, and the BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminating zone
differential current of BBx.
When BC/BS breaker is used to substitute any of feeder breakers, the BC/BS bay will be treated
as a feeder bay, BC/BS SOTF protection will quit and the DZP and BFP logic of the BC/BS bay will
be changed to feeder DZP and BFP logic, overcurrent protection and pole disagreement
protection are still reserved, which can be used as the protection function of the substituted feeder.
In addition, some functions for BC/BS breaker is used as a tie breaker connecting two busbars are
also quit (such as: tripping BC/BS breaker when busbar internal fault happens).
NOTICE!
[BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should be energized PRIOR to [BI_En_BC_Byp].
1. Energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Protected * * * *
zone
……
*
BB1
BC/BS
BB2
Figure 3.16-1 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB2
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the feeder side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
be energized. Negative value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone differential
current of BB2.
2. De-energizing the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp]
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
Protected
* * * *
zone
……
*
BB2
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-2 BC/BS breaker substituting through BB1
The polarity mark of BC/BS CT is on the busbar side, the binary input [BI_En_RevCT_Byp] should
not be energized. Positive value of BC/BS current will be calculated in discriminative zone
differential current of BB1.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.16.1.2 Bypass Breaker Substitution
If dedicated bypass breaker is used to substitute one of feeder breakers through transfer bus, the
polarity mark of bypass breaker CT should be on the busbar side. The CT of the substituted feeder
can be located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-3) or inside of
the transfer bus disconnector (shown in Figure 3.16-4). The protected zone of the device is
different due to the CT location is different (shown in the corresponding figure).
If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is in the protected zone. If bypass disconnector of BBx is closed, bypass breaker
current will be calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BBx (bypass breaker current
will not be calculated in check zone differential current). If bypass disconnector of BB1 and BB2
are closed at the same time, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink1] will be issued. If transfer bus
disconnector of bay n is closed, BB1 disconnector or BB2 disconnector of bay n is closed, and
circuit breaker of bay n is closed, the alarm signal [Alm_IntLink2] or [Alm_IntLink3] will be issued. If
feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder breakers
of bay n is under substituted status, the current of bay n will only be calculated in check zone
differential current and discriminating zone differential current of transfer busbar, no matter BB1
disconnector or BB2 disconnector of the bay is closed or open, the current of bay n will not be
calculated in discriminating zone differential current of BB1 and BB2.
Protected zone
* * * *
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
*
Bypass breaker ……
Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-3 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the
transfer bus disconnector)
If the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the inside of the transfer bus disconnector, the
transfer busbar is not in the protected zone, the substituted feeder will be treated as same as other
feeder bays.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
Transfer bus
disconnector
Transfer Busbar
* * * * *
Protected
zone Bypass breaker ……
Bypass
disconnector
BB2
*
BC/BS
BB1
Figure 3.16-4 Bypass breaker substitution (the CT of the substituted feeder is located at the outside of the
transfer bus disconnector)
3.16.2 I/O Signal
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n is closed, feeder
breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted status alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued. The alarm signal is reset if the
transfer bus disconnector is closed or feeder breaker of bay n is closed.
Table 3.16-1 Input signal of breaker substitution
1 @Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of

2 BI_En_BC_Byp
feeder breakers
Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used

3 BI_En_RevCT_Byp
to substitute one of feeder breakers
Table 3.16-2 Output signal of breaker substitution
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and transfer bus disconnector of bay n

is closed, feeder breakers of bay n is under substituted status, then if the
1 @Bayn.Alm_Byp
transfer bus disconnector is open, substituted status alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.
3.17 GOOSE and SV Function

NOTICE!

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
“@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of
the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module
that located in slot No.m.
PCS-915 can accomplish the control of primary equipment, status exchange of each protection
device and acquisition of binary inputs via GOOSE network. GOOSE receiving links and GOOSE
sending links are provided for each bay which is used to control the GOOSE binary input and
output.
GOOSE and SV module (NR1136A) can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN. It can receive the sampled values (SV) from merging unit
(MU), and it can also receive GOOSE signals from or send GOOSE signals to intelligent terminal
unit.
3.17.1 The Effect of Data Abnormality
In order to prevent the whole protection device from being blocked for abnormality of any data
channel, only some relevant protection elements is blocked selectively according to the different
abnormalities, the specific principle is as follows:
1) If the SV message is invalid, the invalid SV message will be displayed and it will not be
cleared.
2) If any voltage channel is abnormal, the protection will not be blocked and the corresponding
voltage controlled element will be released.
3) If current channel of feeder m is abnormal, busbar differential protection will be disabled, the
integrated protections (such as feeder breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection and
pole disagreement protection) of concerned bay will be disabled automatically whereas the
protections of other healthy bays remains available.
4) If current channel of BC/BS is abnormal, BC/BS protection will be blocked and

inter-connection operation mode will be enabled automatically.
3.17.2 Out of Service of a Bay
If bay n is in service, set the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “1”. if bay n is out of service, set the
function link [@Bayn.Link_On] as “0”, the current of the corresponding bay will be excluded for
differential protection calculation but the actual sampling data can still be displayed, all the
GOOSE sending and receiving of bay n will be interrupted and all the GOOSE and SV alarm
signals of bay n will be shielded. If bay n is out of service ([@Bayn.Link_On]=0) and current is still
detected (larger than 0.04In) in bay n, an alarm signal [@Bayn.Alm_Out] will be issued and the
current will be included for differential protection calculation.

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
3.17.3 Maintenance Binary Input
 GOOSE signal
If the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the sending end does not equals
to that of the receiving end, the received GOOSE signal is invalid.
 SV sampling
When bay n is in service, if the status of the maintenance binary input [BI_Maintenance] of the
device does not equals to that of the MU of corresponding bay, the received sampling data is
invalid, alarm signal will be issued and current differential protection and other protections of the
bay will be blocked.
3.17.4 I/O Signal
Table 3.17-1 Output signal of GOOSE and SV function
Corresponding bay is out of service, but current is still detected

1 @SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Off_SV
(larger than 0.04In)
Corresponding bay is in servicebut the corresponding MU is in

2 @SVLink_Bm_nAlm_Maintenance_SV
maintenance state
Network A of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the

3 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc
protection will not be blocked
Network B of corresponding GOOSE link is disconnected, the

4 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc
protection will not be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of the following conditions

is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the GOOSE receiving end
and the GOOSE sending end) are inconsistent.
5 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg The number of data of received message is not equal to that
configured in the receiving control block.
Failed to analyze the data segment of received message. For
example, the data type of received message is mismatch with
that configured in the receiving control block.
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and

6 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL
SV module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network A of Bx (Bx means

7 Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)
Network storm occurs on GOOSE network B of Bx (Bx means

8 Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL
GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

9 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile
module that located in slot No.x) is wrong
10 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc Network A of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory
11 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc Network B of MU of corresponding bay is disconnected
Sampled values of corresponding bay n error (time over,

12 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data
decoding error or interpolation time scale error)
13 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss The MU of corresponding bay lose synchronism signal
14 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample the sampled data from MU of corresponding bay is invalid
15 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
16 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch Channel delay of corresponding bay changes or out of range
The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and SV

17 Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL
module that located in slot No.x)
The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx (Bx means GOOSE and

18 Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL
SV module that located in slot No.x)
3.17.5 Settings
 Function Link
Table 3.17-2 Function link
No. Symbol Remark
1: Bay n is put into service.

1 @Bayn.Link_On 0: Bay n is out of service.
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
 GOOSE Sending Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links
Table 3.17-3 GOOSE sending link
No. Symbol Remark
1 @Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n
2 @Bayn.GLink_Send_TT GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n
 GOOSE Receiving Link
Access Path: MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).

Date: 2015-07-13
3 Operation Theory

Date: 2015-07-13
4 Supervision
4 Supervision
Table of Contents
4 Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-a
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Protective Device Supervision ....................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision ......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.4 Setting Supervision .............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision ................................................................................... 4-2

4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment............................................... 4-2
4.3.2 Sample Supervision ............................................................................................................. 4-2
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision ...................................................................... 4-2

4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS) .............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS).............................................................................. 4-2
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.5 Handle Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-3
List of Tables
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report ........................................................................................... 4-3

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
4.1 Overview
PCS-915 is a microprocessor based busbar protection which can provide successive automatic
supervision to the protected object to ensure the power system can quickly restore from any fault
to normal state. When the device is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is lightened,
the equipment needs to be checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision
function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup and during normal
operation, plays an important role.
A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions
can still work and alarm output contacts [BO_ALM] in PWR module will be given. However, if
severe hardware failure or abnormality are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and
the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts [BO_FAIL] in PWR module
will be given. The protective device then cannot work normally and maintenance is required to
eliminate the failure.
When an abnormality or a failure is detected by automatic supervision, besides alarm output

contacts or blocking output contacts are energized, it is also followed with an LCD message and
LED indication, at the same time event recording will record the failure alarm which can be viewed
in event recording report and be printed.
4.2 Protective Device Supervision
4.2.1 Hardware Supervision

The automatic supervision function can provide monitoring of all chips on DSP module to ensure
they are healthy. Corresponding alarm signal [Bx.Fail_DSP] will be issued with the device being
blocked if any damages or errors are detected.
4.2.2 Opto-coupler Supply Supervision

The automatic supervision can continuously monitor the positive power supply of opto-coupler, if a
failure or damage is detected, the alarm signal [Bx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued (x is the slot No. of
corresponding binary input module).
4.2.3 Binary Output Supervision

The state of binary outputs of each BO module is continuously monitored. If any abnormality is
detected, the alarm signals [Bx.Fail_Output] will be issued with device being blocked (x is the slot
No. of corresponding BO module).
4.2.4 Setting Supervision

The relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked, if any is out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal
[Fail_Setting_OvRange] will be issued with the protective device be blocked.
If the EEPROM on DSP module is damaged, it will lead to any summation error of all setting
groups, the alarms [B02.Fail_Settings] (protection DSP module) or [B03.Fail_Settings] (fault

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
detector DSP module) will be issued with the protective device blocked.
4.2.5 Hardware Configuration Supervision

Module configuration is checked automatically during device initialization, if the plug-in module
configuration is not consistent with the design drawing of a specific project, the alarm signal
[Fail_BoardConfig] is issued with the device being blocked.
4.3 AC Circuit Supervision
4.3.1 Voltage and Current Drift Supervision and Auto-adjustment

The voltage and current drift are influenced by the variation of temperature or other environment
factors. PCS-915 can continually and automatically trace the drift value and adjust it to normal
value.
4.3.2 Sample Supervision

The device can provide monitoring of AC current and voltage samplings for protection DSP
module and fault detector DSP module. If the detected values of bay n are wrong or inconsistent,
an alarm [@Bayn.Fail_Sample] will be issued and the relay will be blocked.
4.4 Secondary Circuit Supervision
4.4.1 Voltage Transformer Supervision (VTS)

The VTS logic in the relay is used to detect the VT secondary circuit to ensure that voltage
measured is the actual value of power system. When VT failure is detected, device can
automatically adjust the configuration of protective elements of which the stability would be
affected and might lead to mal-operation. Please refer to Section 3.14 for detail.
4.4.2 Current Transformer Supervision (CTS)

The CTS logic can detect the CT secondary circuit to ensure the measured current is the actual
value of power system. The main purpose of CTS is to ensure the integrity of the CT circuits
maintaining the performance of protective equipment. Please refer to Section 3.13 for details.
4.4.3 Disconnector Position Supervision

Disconnector position is monitored by the automatic supervision function to ensure the correct
operation of protective device. Please refer to Section “Position of disconnector and circuit
breaker” in Chapter 3 for details.

Date: 2015-03-07
4 Supervision
4.5 Handle Alarm
PCS-915 can provide self-supervision of hardware circuit and device operation status. When any unnormal condition is detected, the fault information
or report can be displayed and a corresponding alarm will be issued.
NOTICE!
If alarm signal is issued with equipment being blocked, please try to make a fault diagnosis by referring the issued alarm messages BUT
NOT simply reboot or re-power the relay. If user cannot find the failure reason on site, please inform the manufacturer or the agent for
maintenance.
Table 4.5-1 Self-supervision report
Indicator LED Repairmen

No. Alarm Message Meaning Description
HEALTHY MISC ALM CT/VT ALM DS ALM suggestion
The signal is issued

with other specific
alarm signals, and
1 Fail_Device OFF YELLOW OFF OFF The device fails. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.
The signal is issued

with other specific
alarm signals, and
2 Alm_Device GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF The device is abnormal. please refer to the
handling suggestion
other specific alarm
signals.
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Protection 4-3

4 Supervision

Users may pay no

attention to the alarm
signal in the project
commissioning stage,
but it is needed to
download the latest
package file (including
correct version
checksum file)
provided by R&D
The error is found during checking the engineer to make the
3 Alm_Version GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF version of software downloaded to the alarm signal disappear.
device. Then users get the
correct software
version. It is not
allowed that the alarm
signal is issued on the
device already has
been put into service.
the devices having
being put into service
so that the alarm signal
disappears.
The memory of MON plug-in module is Please replace MON

4 Alm_Insuf_Memory GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
insufficient. plug-in module.

4 Supervision

Please check the

settings mentioned in
the prompt message
on the LCD, and go to
After configure file is updated, settings the menu “Settings”
5 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd OFF YELLOW OFF OFF of the file and settings saved on the and select “Confirm
device are not matched. Settings” item to
confirm settings. Then,
the device will restore
to normal operation
stage.
Please reset setting

values according to the
range described in the
instruction manual,
then re-power or
reboot the equipment
6 Fail_Setting_OvRange OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Setting value is out of setting scope.
and the alarm
message will
disappear and the
equipment will restore
to normal operation
state.
Management procedure will upload and Put the protective

7 Alm_Settings_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
check the parameters and settings of device out of service at

4 Supervision

each protection plug-in module once. Inform the

regularly, if the parameters and settings factory or agency to
are inconsistent, the alarm signal will be maintain it.
issued.
8 Process_Exit OFF YELLOW OFF OFF System process of MON module exits.
MON module is under abnormal

9 Alm_MON GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
condition.
Mismatch between the configuration of

10 Fail_BoardConfig OFF YELLOW OFF OFF plug-in boards and the designing
drawing of a specific project.
Binary output or input module located in

11 Bx.Fail_Board OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
slot No.x works abnormally.
Sampled value of bay n is different

12 @Bayn.Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
between two DSP modules.
Sampled value of CT1 of bay n is

13 @Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT1 OFF YELLOW OFF OFF different between two DSP modules (for
double-CT BC/BS).
Sampled value of CT2 of bay n is

14 @Bayn.Fail_Sample_CT2 OFF YELLOW OFF OFF different between two DSP modules (for
double-CT BC/BS).
Sampling value of voltage of BBx is

15 @BBx.Fail_VoltSample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
different between two DSP modules.
Sampled value of protection DSP

16 Fail_Sample OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
module or fault detector DSP module

4 Supervision

errors.
Driving transistors of binary output

17 Bx.Fail_Output OFF YELLOW OFF OFF module located in slot No.x are
damaged.
The EEPROM in the DSP module

18 B02.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
located in slot No.2 is damaged.
The EEPROM in the DSP module

19 B03.Fail_Settings OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
located in slot No.3 is damaged.
DSP chip of the DSP module located in

20 Bx.Fail_DSP OFF YELLOW OFF OFF
slot No.x is under abnormal condition.
No special treatment is
needed, and only wait
21 Alm_CommTest GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF The relay is in test mode.
for the completion of
testing.
Step1: check whether

the selected clock
synchronization mode
matches the clock
synchronization
Time synchronization abnormality
22 Alm_TimeSyn GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF source;
alarm.
Step 2: check whether
the wiring connection
between the
equipment and the
clock synchronization

4 Supervision

source is correct;
Step 3: check whether
the setting for selecting
clock synchronization
(i.e. [Opt_TimeSyn]) is
set correctly. If there is
no clock
synchronization,
please set the setting
[Opt_TimeSyn] as “No
TimeSyn”.
Please refer to other

23 Fail_Pkp OFF YELLOW OFF OFF Device is blocked for over 10s. alarm signal to confirm
the blocking reason.
Alarm signal indicating that the

equipment is in maintenance state (the Check the binary input
24 Alm_Maintenance GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
binary input [BI_Maintenance] is [BI_Maintenance].
energized.
Power supply of the opto-couplers for Check the power circuit

25 Bx.Alm_OptoDC GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF binary input module located in slot No.x of the DC module and
is abnormal. I/O module.
External binary input of blocking BBP

Check the binary input
26 87B.Alm_BI_ExtBlk GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF [87B.BI_ExtBlk] is energized for over
of blocking BBP.
1s.
27 87B.Alm_Pkp_Biased GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Alarm signal indicating that differential Check CT secondary

4 Supervision

current FD element picks up for over circuit includes CT

10s. polarity.
CT circuit failure, refer to Section

28 AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1
29 AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-A CT circuit failure
30 AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-B CT circuit failure
31 AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF Phase-C CT circuit failure
CT circuit abnormality, refer to Section

32 AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
3.13.1.2.
33 AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-A CT circuit abnormality
34 AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-B CT circuit abnormality
35 AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Phase-C CT circuit abnormality Check CT secondary
BCy CT circuit failure, refer to Section circuit.
36 @BCy.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1.
37 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit failure
38 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit failure
39 @BCy.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit failure
BCy CT circuit abnormality, refer to

40 @BCy.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
Section 3.13.1.2.
41 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-A CT circuit abnormality
42 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-B CT circuit abnormality
43 @BCy.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy phase-C CT circuit abnormality

4 Supervision

BSz CT circuit failure, refer to Section

44 @BSz.AlmH_CTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.13.1.1.
45 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_A GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit failure
46 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_B GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit failure
47 @BSz.AlmH_CTS_C GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit failure
BSz CT circuit abnormality, refer to

48 @BSz.AlmL_CTS GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
Section 3.13.1.2.
49 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_A GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-A CT circuit abnormality
50 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_B GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-B CT circuit abnormality
51 @BSz.AlmL_CTS_C GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz phase-C CT circuit abnormality
Differential current high value alarm

52 @BBx.AlmH_Diff GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF signal of BBx, please refer to Section
3.13.1.3.
Differential current low value alarm

53 @BBx.AlmL_Diff GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF signal of BBx, please refer to Section
3.13.1.3.
BBx VT circuit failure, refer to Section

54 @BBx.Alm_VTS GREEN OFF YELLOW OFF
3.14.1. Check VT secondary
VCE (of BBP or BFP) of BBx picks up circuit.
55 @BBx.Alm_VCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
for over 3s.
Alarm signal indicating BBP is disabled.

Check whether BBP is
56 87B.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF If the logic setting [87B.En_Alm_Off] is
disabled.
set as “1”, once BBP is disabled (BBP

4 Supervision

can be disabled by the corresponding

enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating BBP is disabled will be
issued.
Check whether binary

Closing binary input [@Bayn.BI_Cls] is
57 @Bayn.Alm_Cls GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF input of closing of bay
energized for over 10s.
n is always energized
Check whether the

Alarm signal indicating that feeder DZP measured current
58 @Bayn.50DZ.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
FD of bay n picks up for over 10s. equals to the actual
current.
Alarm signal indicating that FD element Check whether the

59 @BCy.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF for SOTF protection of BCy picks up for setting [50SOTF.I_Set]
over 10s. is reasonable and
check whether the
Alarm signal indicating that FD element
measured current
60 @BSz.50SOTF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF for SOTF protection of BSz picks up for
equals to the actual
over 10s.
current.
Alarm signal indicating that phase Check whether the

61 @Bayn.50/51P.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks corresponding current
up for over 10s. setting is reasonable
Alarm signal indicating that ground and check whether the
62 @Bayn.50/51G.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF overcurrent FD element of bay n picks measured current
up for over 10s. equals to the actual

4 Supervision

current.
Alarm signal indicating that PD

protection FD element of bay n picks up Check the
for over 10s (i.e. pole disagreement corresponding pole
63 @Bayn.62PD.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
binary input of bay n disagreement binary
[@Bayn.62PD.BI_PD] is energized for input.
over 10s).
Binary input of initiating BCy BFP is

64 @BCy.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating BC BFP
65 @BCy.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BCy is continually energized for over externally.
10s.
Binary input of initiating BSz BFP is

66 @BSz.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating BS BFP
67 @BSz.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF BSz is continually energized for over externally.
10s.
Check the contact of

initiating BC BFP
externally and check
68 @BCy.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF whether the protective
for BCy BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BC BFP) drops
off.

4 Supervision


initiating BS BFP
externally and check
69 @BSz.50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF whether the protective
for BSz BFP picks up for over 10s.
element (which can
initiate BS BFP) drops
off.
Binary input of initiating contact of BFP

70 @Bayn.Alm_BI_BFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
of bay n is energized for over 10s. Check the contact of
The common initiating contact of BFP of initiating feeder BFP
71 @Bayn.Alm_BI_ChkBFI GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF bay n is continually energized for over externally.
10s.

Binary input of releasing voltage releasing voltage
72 50BF.Alm_BI_RlsVCE GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF controlled element of breaker failure controlled element of
protection is energized for over 10s. breaker failure
protection.

initiating feeder BFP
Alarm signal indicating that FD element externally and check
73 50BF.Alm_Pkp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
for BFP of bay n picks up for over 10s whether the protective
element (which can
initiate BFP) drops off.
Alarm signal indicating feeder BFP is Check whether BFP is

74 50BF.Alm_Off GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
disabled. If the logic setting disabled.

4 Supervision

[50BF.En_Alm_Off] is set as “1”, once

feeder BFP is disabled (feeder BFP can
be disabled by the corresponding
enabling binary input, function link or
enabling logic setting), the alarm signal
indicating feeder BFP is disabled will be
issued.
Disconnector position of bay n is

75 @Bayn.Alm_DS GREEN OFF OFF YELLOW
abnormal.
Check auxiliary contact
BBn disconnector and BBm
of disconnector.
76 Alm_IntLink GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF disconnector of the same feeder are
closed at the same time.
Normally closed auxiliary contact of bay

77 @Bayn.Alm_52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF n breaker is energized but current can
still be detected in bay n. Check auxiliary contact
Normally closed and normally open of circuit breaker of bay
auxiliary contact of bay n breaker are n.
78 @Bayn.Alm_52a&52b GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
energized or de-energized
simultaneously for over 5s.
Normally closed and normally open

Check auxiliary contact
auxiliary contact of BBx disconnector of
79 @Bayn.Alm_89a&89b_@BBx GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF of disconnector of bay
bay n is energized or de-energized
n
simultaneously for over 5s.
If feeder breaker of bay n is open and Check the transfer bus

80 @Bayn.Alm_Byp GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
transfer bus disconnector of bay n is disconnector.

4 Supervision

closed, feeder breakers of bay n is

under substituted status, then if the
transfer bus disconnector is open,
substituted status alarm signal
[@Bayn.Alm_Byp] will be issued.
Following alarm signals are configured only for digital substation

“@SVLink_Bm_n” is used to refer to the label setting of the SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m. “@GLink_Bm_n” is used to refer
to the label setting of the GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.m.
Corresponding bay is in service but the

81 @SVLink_Bm_n.Alm_Maintenance_SV GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF corresponding MU is in maintenance
state
Network A of MU of corresponding bay

82 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_ADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
is disconnected
Network B of MU of corresponding bay

83 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_BDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
is disconnected
Check the
Sampled values of corresponding bay n corresponding MU,
84 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Data GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF error (time over, decoding error or check the optical fiber
interpolation time scale error) connected to it.
The MU of corresponding bay lose
85 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_SynLoss GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
synchronism signal
the sampled data from MU of

86 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_InvalidSample GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
corresponding bay is invalid
87 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_Jitter_Ch GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Sampling frame jittering alarm signal
88 @SVLink_Bm_n.SVAlm_TimeLag_Ch GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF Channel delay of corresponding bay

4 Supervision

changes or out of range
Internal SV configuration file of Bx (Bx Inform commissioning

89 Bx.SVAlm_CfgFile GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF means GOOSE and SV module that personnel to check the
located in slot No.x) is wrong. SV configuration file.
Network A of corresponding GOOSE

90 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_ADisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF link is disconnected, the protection will Check the intelligent
not be blocked terminal unit, check the
Network B of corresponding GOOSE optical fiber connected
91 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_BDisc GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF link is disconnected, the protection will to them.
not be blocked
The alarm signal will be issued if any of

the following conditions is satisfied.
Configuration version of two ends (the
GOOSE receiving end and the GOOSE
sending end) are inconsistent.
The number of data of received
Inform commissioning
92 @GLink_Bm_n.GAlm_Cfg GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF message is not equal to that configured
personnel to check the
in the receiving control block.
GOOSE configuration
Failed to analyze the data segment of
file.
received message. For example, the
data type of received message is
mismatch with that configured in the
receiving control block.
Internal GOOSE configuration file of Bx

93 Bx.GAlm_CfgFile_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
(Bx means GOOSE and SV module that

4 Supervision

located in slot No.x) is wrong.
Network storm occurs on GOOSE

network A of Bx (Bx means GOOSE
94 Bx.GAlm_AStorm_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
and SV module that located in slot
Check the
No.x).
corresponding GOOSE
Network storm occurs on GOOSE
network.
network B of Bx (Bx means GOOSE
95 Bx.GAlm_BStorm_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF
and SV module that located in slot
No.x).
The overall SV alarm signal of Bx (Bx

96 Bx.SVAlm_Overall_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF means GOOSE and SV module that
located in slot No.x) Refer to other GOOSE
The overall GOOSE alarm signal of Bx or SV alarm signal
97 Bx.GAlm_Overall_PL GREEN YELLOW OFF OFF (Bx means GOOSE and SV module that
located in slot No.x)

4 Supervision

Table of Contents
5 Measurement and Recording........................................................... 5-a
5.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ....................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 ............................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 .......................................................... 5-2
5.3 Event & fault Records ..................................................................................... 5-3

5.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording ........................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.4 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

Date: 2013-12-13

Date: 2013-12-13
5.1 General Description
PCS-915 busbar protection can provide auxiliary functions such as on-line data metering, binary
input status, event and disturbance recording, to meet the demands of the modern power grid
requirements.
5.2 Measurement
PCS-915 can provide continuous measurements of analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or by the software interface on
the local or remote PC. The analog quantities will be displayed as RMS values of the secondary
side of CT.
Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. The RMS value is calculated in each interval and the LCD
display will be updated in every 0.5 second.
Users can view the measured data on LCD by navigating the menu “Measurements”, or by
PCS-Explorer software or substation automatic system (SAS) software. By navigating the path
“Settings”->“Device Setup” ->“Comm Settings”, primary or secondary sampled values can be
selected to display by configuring the setting [Opt_Display_Status].
PCS-915 has two DSP modules that are protection DSP module (DSP module 1) and fault
detector DSP module (DSP module 2), the sampling values of both modules can be displayed on
LCD through different access menu.
NOTICE!
If the communication setting [Opt_Display_Status] is not configured, the sampled

values are displayed as secondary value by default. If the setting is set as “0”, the
sampled values are displayed as primary value; if this setting is set as “1”, the sampled
values are displayed as secondary value.
NOTICE!
The bay label of displayed sampled values will change according to the label settings of
each bay and busbar. In section 5.2, “@BBx” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding busbar and “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of
corresponding bay.
5.2.1 Analogue Input Quantities of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2
Item Rotation Description
Id_CZ A,B,C Three-phase check zone differential currents
@BBx.Id A,B,C Three-phase discriminating zone differential currents of BBx
@BBx.UP A,B,C Three phase voltages of BBx
@Bayn.IP A,B,C Three phase currents of bay n

Date: 2013-12-13
@Bayn.IP_CT1 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.IP_CT2 A,B,C Three phase currents of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Measured Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Measured Values
5.2.2 Phase Angle of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

When voltage is sampled by the device and phase A voltage of BB1 is larger than a certain value,
the phase A voltage of BB1 will be taken as a reference; if the phase A voltage of BB1 is smaller
than the certain value and the phase A voltage of BB2 is larger than the certain value, the phase A
voltage of BB2 will be taken as a reference; and so forth.
When voltage is not sampled by the device, if the currents of some feeder are larger than a
certain value, the phase A current of the feeder (takes the feeder whose number is minimal) will
be taken as a reference.
If the phase A voltage of BBx is taken as a reference, the displayed

value of“AngRef” is “x”, If phase A voltage of all busbars are all
smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of “AngRef” is “0”.
AngRef If the phase A current of feeder m is taken as a reference, the
displayed value of “AngRef” is “m” (m=01, 02, 03, ……), if all the
currents are smaller than a certain value, the displayed value of
“AngRef” is “0”.
@Bayn.Ang(IP) A,B,C The phase angle of current of bay n
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT1) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.Ang(IP_CT2) A,B,C The phase angle of current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@BBx.Ang(UP) A,B,C The phase angle of voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Phase Angle
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Phase Angle
5.2.3 Debug Values of DSP module 1 and DSP module 2

The debug values are usually provided for commission person for reference.
@Bayn.I2 Negative sequence current of bay n
@Bayn.I2_CT1 Negative sequence current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.I2_CT2 Negative sequence current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0 Residual current of bay n

Date: 2013-12-13
@Bayn.3I0_CT1 Residual current of CT1 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@Bayn.3I0_CT2 Residual current of CT2 of bay n (for double-CT BC/BS)
@BBx.U2x Negative sequence voltage of BBx
@BBx.3U0 Residual voltage of BBx
Access path:
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements1Cal Values
MainMenuMeasurementsMeasurements2Cal Values
5.3 Event & fault Records
5.3.1 Introduction
PCS-915 is capable of providing fault and disturbance recording, event recording and present
recording for the protected objects. All the recorded information except for waveform can be
viewed on local LCD or by printing. Waveform must be printed or be extracted using PCS-Explorer
software and a waveform software.
5.3.2 Event Recording

The device can store up to 1024 abnormality alarm reports and 1024 binary input status changing
reports respectively. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the available
space is fully occupied, the oldest report is automatically overwritten by the latest one.
 Abnormality alarm reports
Abnormality detected during relay self-supervision, secondary circuit abnormality or protection

alarm element will be logged as individual events.
 Binary input status changing reports
When binary input status changes, the changed information will be displayed on LCD and logged
as binary input change report at the same time.
5.3.3 Disturbance and Fault Recording

5.3.3.1 Application
Users can use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the
power network and related primary and secondary device during and after a disturbance.
Analyzing on the recorded data can help to resolve practical problem.
5.3.3.2 Design
Disturbance recorder is consisted of tripping report and fault waveform and it is triggered by fault
detector. The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports and waveforms in non-volatile memory.
When protection operates, the operating information will be displayed on LCD and logged as trip
record at same time, which can be viewed in trip report. Here fault recording includes two kinds of

Date: 2013-12-13
cases:
1) Only the fault detector element operates.
2) The fault detector element operates along with the operation of protective elements.
1. Trip record capacity and information
The device can store 32 pieces of trip reports in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
the spaces are fully occupied, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
A complete trip record includes the following items:
1) Sequence number
Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.
2) Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is when a fault
detector picks up. The relative time is the time when protection element operates to send tripping
signal after fault detector picks up.
3) Faulty phase
The faulty phase detected by the operating element is shown in the record report.
4) Operating time
It is the relative time when protection element operates to send tripping signal relative to fault
detector element operating, the operating time of output relay is not included.
5) Protection element
The protection element that issues the tripping command will be shown. If no protection element
operates to trip but only fault detector element operates, the fault report will record the title of fault
detector element.
6) Tripping element
The tripped elements (feeder or bus coupler) are also shown.
2. Fault waveform record capacity and information
MON module of the relay can store 32 pieces of fault waveform in non-volatile memory. Phase
current of each bay, check zone differential current, discriminative zone differential current and
buabar voltages (if voltage is used) will be recorded in waveform. If a new fault occurs when 32
fault waveform recorders have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original
current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.
Each time recording includes 2-cycle pre-fault waveform, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.

Date: 2013-12-13
5.3.4 Present Recording

Present recording is used to record the waveform of present operating device which can be
triggered manually on LCD of device or remotely through PCS-Explorer software. Recording
content of present recording is same to that of disturbance recording. Each time recording
includes 2-cycle waveform before triggering, and up to 250 cycles can be recorded.

Date: 2013-12-13

Date: 2013-12-13
6 Hardware
6 Hardware
Table of Contents
6 Hardware ............................................................................................ 6-a
6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only) ............................................................ 6-5
6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only) ..................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition ............................................................. 6-10

6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301) ....................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102) ................................................................ 6-12
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ...................................... 6-14
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D) ................................ 6-14
6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B) ................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional) ................................................................. 6-16
6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module .................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401) .................................................................................. 6-23
List of Figures
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915 ..................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915 .......................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915.................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915................................................................................ 6-6
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 ......................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301 ........................................................ 6-11
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-11
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules ................................................................................ 6-13

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface.................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules.................................................................................. 6-15
Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules......................................................... 6-15
Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module .................................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ............................................... 6-17
Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS ............................................. 6-20
Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C
are similar to it) .................................................................................................................. 6-21
Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A ............................................................. 6-22
Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A ............................................................ 6-23
Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module .................. 6-24
Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module
.............................................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ..................................... 6-25
Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module ..................................................................... 6-26
List of Tables
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration .............................................................................. 6-1
Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A ................................................. 6-17
Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A ................................................. 6-18
Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS............................................... 6-20

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
PCS-915 adopts 32-bit micro-processor CPU for logic calculations and function management. The
protection calculations are processed by high-speed digital signal processor DSP. System
parameters are sampled at 24 points in every cycle. The sampling data are parallel processed in
each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of protection device.
PCS-915 captures current and voltage signal and converts to small signals. These small signals
will be filtered and converted to digital signals by AD converter before being sent to protection
calculation module (DSP module 1) and fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2). When
MON module completes all the protection calculations, the results will be stored in 32-bit CPU on
MON module. DSP module 1 carries out protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON
module can provide sequence of event (SOE) record, waveform recording, printing,
communication between protection and substation automatic system (SAS) and communication
between HMI and CPU. The operating procedures of fault detector calculation module are similar
to that of protection calculation module, and the only difference is, when fault detector calculation
module decides a fault detector picks up, only the positive power supply of output relay is switched
on.
Table 6.1-1 PCS-915 module configuration
No. ID Module Description
1 NR1101/NR1102 Management module (MON module)
2 NR1115/NR1151 Protection calculation module (DSP module 1)
3 NR1115/NR1151 Fault detector calculation module (DSP module 2)
4 NR1401 Analog input module ( AI module)
5 NR1501/NR1503/NR1506 Binary input module (BI module)
6 NR1521/NR1523/NR1549 Binary output module (BO module)
7 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module)
8 NR1136 GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP module)
9 NR1201 CAN bus extended module (CAN module)
10 Human machine interface module (HMI module)
 MON module provides management function, completed event record, setting management,
and etc.
 DSP modules can provide filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector
calculation.
 AI module converts AC current and voltage to low voltage signals by current transformers
and voltage transformers respectively.
 BI module provides binary inputs that are inputted via 110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler
(configurable).

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
 BO module provides all kinds of binary output contacts, including signal output contacts and
tripping output contacts.
 PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V to different DC voltage levels on request for

various modules of the device
 NET-DSP module (optional) receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV)
from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.
 CAN module (optional) realizes the CAN bus connection between 8U chassis and 4U
extended chassis for 8U+4U PCS-915 device.
 HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicator and multiplex RJ45 ports for user as
human-machine interface
Following figure shows typical front view of 8U size PCS-915.
1
HEALTHY
11 PCS-915
2 12
MISC ALM BUSBAR RELAY
3 13
4 14
P
GR
5 15
6 16 ENT
C
ES
7 17
8 18
9 19
10 20
Figure 6.1-1 Front view of 8U PCS-915
Following figures show typical rear view of 8U size PCS-915.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
NR1102M NR1115 NR1115 NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1301
1 1
5V BJ
2 2
BJJ BSJ
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A
DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER
Slot No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Figure 6.1-2 Typical rear view of 8U PCS-915
For a specific project, if more than 16 bays are supported, additional 4U extended chassis is
equipped, the typical rear view of 8U+4U size PCS-915 is shown as follows.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
NR1102M NR1115 NR1115 NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1301
1 1
TERM_H 5V BJ
TERM_T
2 2
PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
CAN/PPS 9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A
DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER DANGER
Slot No. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Slot No. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P2
NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1505
NR1506AS NR1201B NR1301
NR1301A
TERM_H 5V BJ
TERM_T
PPS
BJJ BSJ
RESV
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
CAN/PPS 9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.1-3 Typical rear view of 8U+4U PCS-915

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Typical Wiring of 8U PCS-915 (For reference only)
NR1102M NR1115C NR1115C NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1301
MON module
DSP module
DSP module
PWR module
BO module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
Slot No.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Power supply supervision 0401

1601
1602 Ia_Bay01
BI_01 + 0402
1603
1604 Ib_Bay01
…
1605
Ic_Bay01 BI_20 + 0421
1606
Current input
*BI plug-in modules

……
- 0422
……
2219
Power supply supervision
2220 Ia_Bay16 1401
2221
BI_01 + 1402
2222 Ib_Bay16
2223
…
2224 Ic_Bay16
BI_20 + 1421
- 1422
2407
2408 Ua_BB1
1501
Controlled by fault detector

2409 BO_01 1502
2410 Ub_BB1
element
1503
2411 BO_02 1504
Voltage input
2412 Uc_BB1
…
1521
……
BO_11 1522
2419
Ua_BB3 2601
2420 Controlled by fault detector
BO_01 2602
2421
Ub_BB3
element
2422 2603
BO_02 2604
2423
…
Uc_BB3 2621
2424
BO_11 … 2622
PWR+ P110
External DC power Power 3101
supply P111 Supply BO_01

PWR- 3102
P107
element
OPTO+ 3103
Power supply for
BO_02 3104
opto-coupler (24V) P108
OPTO-
…
3121
BO_11 3122
P102 BO_FAIL
P103 BO_ALM
3201
Controlled by fault
detector element
P101 COM BO_01 3202

P105 BO_FAIL
…
3211
P106 BO_ALM BO_06 3212
P104 COM
cable with single point earthing
To the screen of other coaxial
Not controlled by fault
3213
detector element
BO_07
SYN+ 0101 3214
Clock SYN
SYN- 0102 3215

BO_08
SGND 0103 3216
0104
3217
element, magnetic latched
BO_09
PRINTER
RTS 0105 3218

PRINT
TXD 0106 3219

SGND 0107 BO_10 3220
3221
BO_11 3222
Multiplex
0012
RJ45 (Front)
0225
Grounding
Bus
Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of 8U PCS-915

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2.2 Typical Wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915 (For reference only)
NR1102M
MON module NR1115C NR1115C NR1201B NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1521A NR1301
CAN module
DSP module
DSP module
PWR module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BO module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1401 NR1521A NR1521A NR1523A
BO module
BO module
BO module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
AI module
Slot No.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1506AS NR1201B NR1301
CAN module
PWR module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
BI module
Slot No. BI module

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P2
The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
1601 0901
Controlled by fault
detector element
Ia_Bay01 BO_01 0902
1602 8U chassis
…
1603 0921
1604 Ib_Bay01 BO_11 0922
1605
…
1606 Ic_Bay01
1501
Controlled by fault
detector element
……
BO_01 1502
Current input
2801
…
1521
2802 Ia_Bay25
BO_11 1522
2803
2804 Ib_Bay25
Controlled by fault
detector element
3001
2805 BO_01 3002
2806 Ic_Bay25
…
3021
2807 BO_11 3022
2808 Ua_BB1
3101
Controlled by fault
detector element
2809
BO_01 3102
2810 Ub_BB1
…
3121
2811
BO_11
Voltage input
Uc_BB1 3122
2812
……
2819 3201
Controlled by fault
detector element
Ua_BB3 BO_01
2820 3202
…
2821 3211
Ub_BB3 BO_06
2822 3212
2823
Not controlled by fault

Uc_BB3 3213
detector element
2824 BO_07
3214
3215
0501 Power supply supervision
BO_08
3216
0502 + BI_01
3217
element, magnetic latched
BO_09 3218
…
3219
0521 + BI_20 BO_10 3220
*BI plug-in modules
0522 3221
- BO_11
……
3222
0801 BO_FAIL P102
BO_ALM P103
0802 + BI_01 P101
COM
BO_FAIL P105
…
BO_ALM P106
0821 + BI_20 P104
COM
P110 PWR+
0822 - Power External DC power
Supply P111 supply

PWR-
SYN+ 0101 P107
Clock SYN
OPTO+
SYN- 0102 Power supply for
P108 opto-coupler (24V)
SGND 0103 OPTO-
CAN/PPS
0104 Multiplex
RJ45 (Front)
PRINTER
RTS 0105
PRINT
0012
TXD 0106
CAN bus
0225
SGND 0107 extended wire
Grounding Bus
0401 Power supply supervision

CAN/PPS
4U extended chassis
0402 + BI_01
…
BO_FAIL P202
0421 + BI_20 BO_ALM P203

*BI plug-in modules
COM P201
0422 - P205
……
BO_FAIL
BO_ALM P206
1401 P204
COM
P210 PWR+
1402 + BI_01
Power External DC power
Supply P211 supply
PWR-
…
P207 OPTO+
BI_20 Power supply for
1421 +
P208 opto-coupler (24V)
OPTO-
1422 - 0012
0225
Grounding Bus
Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of 8U+4U PCS-915

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.2.3 CT Requirement
-Rated primary current Ipn:
According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.
-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:
According to the maximum load current.
-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:
According to the maximum fault current.
-Rated secondary current Isn
-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:
Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)
Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)
Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)
Isn Rated secondary current (amps)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Performance verification
Esl > Esl′
Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)
IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Rated resistance burden (ohms)
Rbn 2
Rbn=Sbn/Isn
Sbn Rated burden (VAs)
Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl′
Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
k stability factor = 2
Protective checking factor current (amps)
Ipcf
Same as the maximum prospective fault current
Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance (ohms)
Real resistance burden (ohms)
Rb
Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)

RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)
Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)
For example:
1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA
Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)
= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V
2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A
Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn
= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn
= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V
Thus, Esl > Esl′
6.3 Plug-in Module Terminal Definition
PCS-915 consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, analog input module,
binary input module and binary output module. The definition and application of each module and
its terminals are introduced as follows.
6.3.1 PWR Module (Slot P1: NR1301)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in the chapter of
“Technical Data”. The standard output voltages are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the
output voltages are continuously monitored.
The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power
supply in this device. The +24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this
device.
The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.
A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1301
5V OK ALM
BO_ALM BO_FAIL
ON
OFF
1 BO_COM1
2 BO_FAIL
3 BO_ALM
4 BO_COM2
5 BO_FAIL
6 BO_ALM
7 OPTO+
8 OPTO-
9
10 PWR+
11 PWR-
12 GND
Figure 6.3-1 View of DC power supply module NR1301
For some occasions, the power switch in the dotted box of above figure is not existed.
01
BO_FAIL
02
BO_ALM
03
04
BO_FAIL
05
BO_ALM
06
Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module
Pin No. Symbol Description
01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1.
02 BO_Fail_1 Equipment failure output 1 (01-02, NC)
03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Equipment abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2.
05 BO_Fail_2 Equipment failure output 2 (04-05, NC)
06 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Equipment abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)
07 OPTO+ Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the binary input
module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-, the rated output
08 OPTO-
current of this power supply is 200mA.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
09 Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device
12 GND Grounded connection of this device
NOTICE!
The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. Power

supply in other DC voltage levels or AC voltage power supply need to be specially
ordered. It is important to CHECK if the rated voltage of power supply module is the
same as the voltage of external control power supply before the device is put into
service.
NOTICE!
The DC power supply module provides pin 0112 and earth connector for grounding of
device. The pin 0112 shall be connected to earth connector and the earth copper bar of
panel via dedicated grounding wire.
NOTICE!
Effective grounding is the most important measure for device to prevent EMI, so
effective grounding MUST be ensured before the device is put into operation.
6.3.2 MON Module (Slot No.01: NR1101 or NR1102)

The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its can provide management of the complete device,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.
The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.
The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
NR1102M NR1102N NR1101F
ETHERNET
TX
ETHERNET
RX
TX
RX
ETHERNET
Figure 6.3-3 Rear view of MON modules
Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

4 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
03 SGND synchronization
NR1102M 256M DDR Twisted pair wire
04
05 RTS
RS-232 06 TXD To printer
07 SGND
2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire
2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST
01 SYN+
02 SYN- To clock
RS-485
NR1102N 256M DDR 03 SGND synchronization
04 Twisted pair wire
05 RTS
07 SGND
3 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA
01 A To SCADA
NR1101F 256M DDR 02 B Twisted pair wire
RS-485
03 SGND
04

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Module ID Memory Interface Pin No. Usage Physical Layer

05 A
06 B
RS-485 To SCADA
07 SGND
08
09 SYN+
10 SYN- To clock
RS-485
11 SGND synchronization
12
13 RTS
15 SGND
16
The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs is used to connect the “+”
and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other is used to connect the signal ground of the
interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices to a bus through the twisted pair.
The module reserves a free terminal for all the communication ports; the free terminal does not
need to be connected.
Twisted pair wire

A 01
B 02
COM
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

SYN+ 01
CLOCK SYN
SYN- 02
SGND 03
04
Twisted pair wire

RTS 05
PRINT
TXD 06
SGND 07
Figure 6.3-4 Wiring of communication interface
6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)

The DSP Module 1 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of protection logic and
tripping output etc.
6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation, NR1115C or NR1151D)

The DSP Module 2 consists of high-performance digital signal processor and other peripherals.
The functions of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of fault detector elements

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
and providing positive power supply to output relay.
DSP module 1 and DSP module 2 have the same hardware configuration. The following figure
shows rear views and terminal definitions for different type of DSP modules; the corresponding
module shall be adopted in accordance with concrete situation.
NR1115C NR1151D
1 1 2 3
4 5 6
2
Figure 6.2-5 Rear view of DSP modules
6.3.5 CAN Module (NR1201B)

The CAN bus extended module NR1201B is only equipped for 8U+4U PCS-915 device, 8U
chassis and 4U extended are equipped with one NR1201B module respectively, the CAN bus of
8U chassis and 4U extended chassis are connected together via a CAN extended wire, then the
8U device can get and control the signal of IO module of the 4U extended device.
NR1201B
TERM-H
TERM-T
PPS
RESV
CAN/PPS
Figure 6.2-6 Rear view of CAN bus extended modules

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
6.3.6 NET-DSP Module (GOOSE and SV, Optional)
NR1136A NR1136C
RX
Figure 6.3-7 View of NET-DSP module
This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), up to eight 100Mbit/s
optical-fibre interfaces (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE
and SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols and can be used for GOOSE & SV message transmission by
point-to-point connection or via LAN It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent
control device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit). Each interface can be dedicated for
GOOSE or SV message, it can also be shared by GOOSE & SV message.
This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588
protocol can be selected. This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message
format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.
6.3.7 Binary Input (BI) Module

NR1501A, NR1503A and NR1506AS modules are three types of standard BI modules. All the
binary inputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement, please
refer to Chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
 NR1501A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1501A and 14 configurable high voltage binary inputs
(per two binary inputs share one common negative power input of opto-coupler) are equipped with
it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
BI_01 01
NR1501A BI_02 02
COM1- 03
BI_03 04
01
02 BI_04 05
03
COM2- 06
04
05 BI_05 07
06
BI_06 08
07
08 COM3- 09
09
BI_07 10
10
11 BI_08 11
12
13 COM4- 12
14 BI_09 13
15
16 BI_10 14
17
COM5- 15
18
19 BI_11 16
20
BI_12 17
21
22 COM6- 18
BI_13 19
BI_14 20
COM7- 21
22
Figure 6.3-8 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A
Table 6.3-1 Pin definition of binary input module NR1501A

01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1.
03 COM1- Common terminal 1 of negative pole of power supply of the module

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

22 Blank Blank
 NR1503A
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1503A and 11 configurable high voltage binary inputs
are equipped with it, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler. The
inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and 250V.
BI_01 01
NR1503A Opto01- 02
BI_02 03
Opto02- 04
BI_03 05
Opto03- 06
BI_04 07
Opto04- 08
BI_05 09
Opto05- 10
BI_06 11
Opto06- 12
BI_07 13
Opto07- 14
BI_08 15
Opto08- 16
BI_09 17
Opto09- 18
BI_10 19
Opto10- 20
BI_11 21
Opto11- 22
Figure 6.3-4 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A
Table 6.3-2 Pin definition of binary input module NR1503A

01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1
02 Opto01- Negative pole of power supply of configurable binary input 1

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

 NR1506AS
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1506AS and 20 configurable high voltage binary
inputs are equipped with it. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 110V, 220V, 125V and
250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.
An internal binary input [BI_COMMON] is equipped for NR1506AS type BI module, please refer to
Section 3.12.2.2 for details.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Opto+ 01
BI_01 02
NR1506AS
BI_02 03
BI_03 04
01
BI_04 05
02
03 BI_05 06
04
BI_06 07
05
06 BI_07 08
07
08 BI_08 09
09
BI_09 10
10
11 BI_10 11
12
BI_11 12
13
14 BI_12 13
15
BI_13 14
16
17 BI_14 15
18
19 BI_15 16
20 BI_16 17
21
22 BI_17 18
BI_18 19
BI_19 20
BI_20 21
COM- 22
BI_COMMON
Figure 6.3-9 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS
Table 6.3-3 Pin definition of binary input module NR1506AS

01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the module

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware

22 COM- Common terminal of negative pole of power supply of the module
6.3.8 Binary Output (BO) Module

NR1521A, NR1521B, NR1521C, NR1523A and NR1549A are five types of standard BO modules.
All the binary outputs can be configured by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement,
please refer to chapter 9 about the concrete operation method.
It is recommended that the BO contacts controlled by fault detector is used for tripping or operating
signals BO, and the BO contacts not controlled by fault detector is used for alarm signal and other
signal BO.
 NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C
NR1521A can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact will be
controlled by the fault detector.
NR1521B can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, the first 9 BO contacts will be
controlled by fault detector and the last two BO contacts will not.
NR1521C can provide 11 normally open (NO) BO contacts, and each output contact is not
controlled by the fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C. The pin definition of
the connectors is described as below.
01
BO_01
NR1521A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
Figure 6.3-10 Pin definition of BO module NR1521A (Pin definition of NR1521B and 1521C are similar to it)

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
 NR1523A
NR1523A can provide 11 signal output contacts and all the contacts are normally open (NO)
contacts. Only the last three contacts ([BO_09], [BO_10] and [BO_11]) are magnetic latched NO
contacts defined as protection tripping signal generally. Except for [BO_07] and [BO_08], all the
other contacts will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.
01
BO_01
NR1523A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
Figure 6.3-11 Pin definition of BO module NR1523A
 NR1549A
NR1549A can provide 11 output contacts and all the contacts are magnetic latched normally open
(NO) contacts and will be controlled by positive power supply of fault detector.
A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
01
BO_01
NR1549A 02
03
BO_ 02
04
05
BO_ 03
06
07
BO_ 04
08
09
BO_ 05
10
11
BO_ 06
12
13
BO_ 07
14
15
BO_ 08
16
17
BO_ 09
18
19
BO_ 10
20
21
BO_ 11
22
Figure 6.3-12 Pin definition of BO module NR1549A
6.3.9 Analog Input (AI) Module (NR1401)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT, the module is
not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.
The NR1401 module can provide 12-channel analog signal inputs. A 24-pin connector is fixed on
the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is described as below (Take the typical
definition of the first analog input module as an example).
Two kinds of AI modules (12-channel current AI module, 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage
AI module) can be used for PCS-915. If voltage is connected, one 3-channel current and
9-channel voltage AI module should be configured. For current channel, rating 5 A or 1 A can be
selected. Please declare which kind of AI module is needed before ordering. Maximum linear
range of the current converter is 40In.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Ia_Bay01 01 Ian_Bay01 02
NR1401
Ib_Bay01 03 Ibn_Bay01 04
Ic_Bay01 05 Icn_Bay01 06
Figure 6.3-13 Typical pin definition of the first 12-channel current AI module
Ia_Bayxx 01 Ian_Bayxx 02
NR1401
Ib_Bayxx 03 Ibn_Bayxx 04
Ic_Bayxx 05 Icn_Bayxx 06
Ua_BB1 07 Uan_BB1 08
Ub_BB1 09 Ubn_BB1 10
Uc_BB1 11 Ucn_BB1 12
Figure 6.3-14 Typical pin definition of 3-channel current and 9-channel voltage AI module
For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as
below.

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
Plug
Socket
In
Out
plug is not put in the socket
In
Out
Put the plug in the socket
Figure 6.3-15 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed
P2 S2
P1 S1
02 01
04 03
06 05
Figure 6.3-16 Current connection of AI module

Date: 2015-07-13
6 Hardware
13 14
15 16
17 18
Figure 6.3-17 Voltage connection of AI module

Date: 2015-07-13
7 Settings
7 Settings
Table of Contents
7 Settings .............................................................................................. 7-a
7.1 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-3
7.3 Label Settings................................................................................................ 7-10
7.4 Function Links................................................................................................ 7-11
7.5 System Settings ............................................................................................ 7-14
7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links............................................................................... 7-16
7.7 GOOSE Sending Links ................................................................................. 7-16

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Settings are classified to two kinds, protection settings and common settings. Each protection
element has its independent setting menu which are given detailed description in chapter
“Operation Theory”. In this chapter only common settings are introduced. Common settings
consist of device settings, communication settings, label settings, system settings, function links
and etc.
PCS-915 has ten protection setting groups to coordinate with the different modes of power system
operation. One of these setting groups is assigned to be active. However, common settings are
shared by all protection setting groups.
If all the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value (the communication setting
[Opt_Display_Settings] is set as “1” or the setting is not configured), all the current settings are
converted from primary current according to reference CT ratio instead of the actual CT ratio of
each bay.
7.1 Device Settings
 Setting list
No. Item Description Setting Range

0:24V, 1:48V
Voltage level of binary input for the module that
1 Bx.Un_BinaryInput 2:110V, 3:220V, 4: 30V,
located in slot No.x
5: 125V
Select encoding format of header (HDR) file
2 HDR_EncodedMode GB18030, UTF-8
COMTRADE recording file. Default value is “UTF-8”.
0: Current Language
3 Opt_Caption_103 The language of group caption of IEC103 protocol 1: Fixed Chinese
2: Fixed English
Using moveable disk to realize the backup and
0: Disable
4 En_MDisk recovery of program and configuration.
1:Enable
Default value is 0, and the function is reserved.
0: Disable
5 En_Volt_BB Voltage concerned function is enabled or disabled
1:Enable
Following device settings are configured only for digital substation
The SV interpolation back-off time of the GOOSE
6 Bx.t_Dly_Interp_SV 1500μs~15000μs
and SV module that located in slot No.x
0: SV LAN mode
7 Opt_RecvMode_SV SV point-to-point receiving mode is enabled ot not. 1: SV point-to-point
receiving mode
8 N_Ch_Max_SV The maximum number of SV channel 24~40
0: the sample value can be displayed even a bay is
out of service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is
9 En_ClearSV set as “0”). 0, 1
1: the sample value will be cleared if a bay is out of
service (the function link [@Bayn.Link_On] is set as

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
“0”).
 Setting description
1. [Bx.Un_BinaryInput]
The setting is used to set the voltage level of corresponding binary input module. For
high-voltage BI modules, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.
For low-voltage BI modules, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement.
0: 24V
1: 48V
2: 110V
3: 220V
4: 30V
5: 125V
2. [HDR_EncodedMode]
Default value of [HDR_EncodedMode] is 1 (i.e. UTF-8 code) and please set it to 0 (i.e. GB18030)
according to the special requirement.
3. [Opt_Caption_103]
0: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in current language
1: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in Chinese
2: the group caption of IEC103 protocol is in English
It is recommended to be set as “1” if the device communicate with SCADA in Chinese.
4. [En_MDisk]
1: Use moveable disk to realize the backup and recovery function.
0: Moveable disk will be disabled.
A moveable mdisk is implemented on the MON plug-in module to backup and restore programs,
settings and configurations.
If MON plug-in module is broken, remove the mdisk and put it into a new MON plug-in module, use
the menu on HMI to restore the backup programs and configurations. If DSP plug-in module is
broken, after a new DSP plug-in module is installed, use the menu on HMI to restore the backup
programs and configurations. If the moveable mdisk is broken, after a new mdisk is installed on
the MON plug-in module, use the menu on HMI to back up the current programs and
configurations into the new mdisk.
The default setting is 0.
5. [En_Volt_BB]

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
It should be set as “0” if busbar voltage is not connected to PCS-915, then all the voltage
concerned function are disabled. It should be set as “1” if busbar voltage is connected to
PCS-915, then all the voltage concerned function can be enabled (each voltage concerned
function maybe controlled by corresponding logic setting).
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsProduct SetupDevice Settings
7.2 Communication Settings
 Setting list
No. Setting Item Range Description
The IED name defined in 61850

1 IEDNAME
protocol
2 IP_LAN1 IP address of Ethernet port A
3 Mask_LAN1 Subnet mask of Ethernet port A
4 En_LAN1 0,1 Put Ethernet port A into service
5 IP_LAN2 IP address of Ethernet port B
6 Mask_LAN2 Subnet mask of Ethernet port B
7 En_LAN2 0,1 Put Ethernet port B into service
8 IP_LAN3 IP address of Ethernet port C
9 Mask_LAN3 Subnet mask of Ethernet port C
10 En_LAN3 0,1 Put Ethernet port C into service
11 IP_LAN4 IP address of Ethernet port D
12 Mask_LAN4 Subnet mask of Ethernet port D
13 En_LAN4 0,1 Put Ethernet port D into service
000.000.000.000~
14 Gateway Gateway of router
255.255.255.255
Enable/disable sending message in

15 En_Broadcast 0: disable, 1: enable broadcast mode via network.
(IEC103).
Time scale format of IEC

16 Fmt_Net_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for Ethernet
port).
Communication address between the

17 Addr_RS485A 0~255 protective device with the SCADA or
RTU via RS-485 serial port 1.
4800,9600,19200, Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port

18 Baud_RS485A
38400,57600,115200 bps 1.

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Communication protocol of rear

19 Protocol_RS485A 0~2
RS-485 serial port 1.
Spontaneous events are sent in the

format of FUN and INF based on IEC
20 Inf_RS485A_103 0, 1
60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 1).

21 Fmt_RS485A_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 1).
Communication address between the

22 Addr_RS485B 0~255 protective device with the SCADA or
RTU via RS-485 serial port 2.
4800,9600,19200, Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port

23 Baud_RS485B
38400,57600,115200 bps 2.
Communication protocol of rear

24 Protocol_RS485B 0~2
RS-485 serial port 2.
Spontaneous events are sent in the

format of FUN and INF based on IEC
25 Inf_RS485B_103 0, 1
60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 2).

26 Fmt_RS485B_103 0, 1 60870-5-103 protocol (for RS-485
serial port 2).
Threshold value of sending

measurement values to SCADA
27 Threshold_Measmt_Net 0~100% through IEC103 or IEC61850
protocol.
Default value: “1%”.
The time period when the equipment

sends measurement data to SCADA
28 Period_Measmt_Net 0~65535s
through IEC103 protocol.
Default value:”60”.
Select the format of measurement

29 Format_Measmt 0, 1 data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
4800,9600,
30 Baud_Printer Baud rate of printer port
19200,38400, 51600, 115200 bps
0: disable Enable/disable automatic printing

31 En_AutoPrint
1: enable function
32 Opt_TimeSyn Conventional Select the mode of time

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
SAS synchronization of equipment.

Advanced
NoTimeSyn
The address of the external SNTP

000.000.000.000~
33 IP_Server_SNTP clock synchronization server sending
255.255.255.255
SNTP message to the equipment.
The local time zone also refered to as

34 OffsetHour_UTC -12~12hrs
the hour offset hour from UTC .
The offset minute of local time from

35 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60min
UTC.
Primary value/ Measurement values are displayed in

36 Opt_Display_Status
Secondary value primary value or secondary value
Select display primary value or

Primary value/
37 Opt_Display_Settings secondary value for protection
Secondary value
settings
The address of the SNTP clock

38 IP_StandbyServer_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
synchronization standby server.
Logic setting to enable/disable SNTP

39 En_Server_SNTP 0, 1
server mode
Following communication settings are configured only for digital substation
0: PPS
Select the time synchronization
1: IRIGB
40 Opt_TimeSyn_PL source of process layer (the default
2: 1588PPS
value is “1”).
3: SLAVEPPS
GOOSE double-net mode is enabled

or not
41 En_NetB_GOOSE 0, 1
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode
GOOSE single/double-net mode is

enabled or not
42 En_DualNet_GOOSE 0, 1
0: double-net mode
1: single/double-net mode
SV double-net mode is enabled or

not
43 En_NetB_SV 0, 1
0: single-net mode
1: double-net mode
Enable Bx (GOOSE and SV module

44 Bx.En_PPS_Output 0, 1 that located in slot No.x) to output
pulse per second
Following communication settings are configured only when DNP3.0 protocol is adopted

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
The logic setting to enable/disable

45 En_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)
It is the slave address of network

46 Addr_Slave_TCPx_DNP 0~65519
No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the master address of network

47 Addr_Master_TCPx_DNP 0~65519
It is the IP address of network No.x

48 IP_Master_TCPx_DNP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the communication map of

49 Opt_Map_TCPx_DNP 0~4 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)
It is the “OBJ1” default variation of

50 Obj01DefltVar_TCPx_DNP 0~1 network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)

4)

4)

4)

4)
It is the timeout of application layer of

55 t_AppLayer_TCPx_DNP 0~5 (s) network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)
It is the heartbeat time interval of

56 t_KeepAlive_TCPx_DNP 0~7200 (s) network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,
4)
The logic setting is used to enable or

disable the unsolicited message
57 En_UR_TCPx_DNP 0 or 1
function of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the online retransmission number

58 Num_URRetry_TCPx_DNP 2~10 of the unsolicited message of
network No.x DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3,

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
4)
It is the offline timeout of the

59 t_UROfflRetry_TCPx_DNP 1~5000 (s) unsolicited message of network No.x
DNP client. (x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the class level of the “Binary

60 Class_BI_TCPx_DNP 0~3 Input” of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the class level of the “Analog

61 Class_AI_TCPx_DNP 0~3 Input” of network No.x DNP client.
(x=1, 2, 3, 4)
It is the selection timeout of network

62 t_Select_TCPx_DNP 0~240 (s)
It is the time interval of the time

63 t_TimeSynIntvl_TCPx_DNP 0~3600 (s) synchronization function of network
1. [En_LANx] (x= 2, 3, 4)
These setting are used to enable/disable IP addresses of Ethernet 2, 3 and 4 respectively. IP

address of Ethernet 1 is enabled fixedly.
“1”: enable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is needed to
be set.
“0”: disable the IP address of Ethernet port and the corresponding IP address setting is not needed
to be set.
2. [En_Broadcast]
This setting is only used for IEC 103 protocol. If NR network IEC103 protocol is used, the setting
must be set as “1”.
0: the device does not send UDP messages through network;
1: the device sends UDP messages through network.
3. [Fmt_Net_103]
If the setting is set as”0”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e.
4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as”1”, GDD data type of spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report, binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e.
7-byte time scale format.

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
4. [Protocol_RS485x] (x=A, B)
The setting is used to select the communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port x.
0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
1: Modbus protocol
2: DNP protocol
5. [Inf_RS485A_103], [Inf_RS485B_103]
When spontaneous events are sent via generic services based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this
setting should be setting as “0”. When spontaneous events are sent in the format of FUN and INF
based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, this setting should be set as “1”.
6. [Fmt_RS485A_103], [Fmt_RS485B_103]
The setting is invalid if the setting [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as”1”.
If the setting is set as”0” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 18 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 19 (tripping report), i.e. 4-byte time scale format.
If the setting is set as”1” and [Inf_RS485A_103]/[Inf_RS485B_103] is set as “0”, GDD data type of
spontaneous events based on IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is 203 (automatic supervision report,
binary input change report), 204 (tripping report), i.e. 7-byte time scale format.
7. [Format_Measmt]
The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC103
protocol.
0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12;
1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard.
8. [En_AutoPrint]
If automatic print is required for disturbance report after protection operating, the setting should be
set as “1”.
9. [Opt_TimeSyn]
There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, each selection includes different time
clock synchronization signals shown in following table.
Item Description
PPS(RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level.
IRIG-B(RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level.
Conventional
PPM(DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
PPS(DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn].
SNTP(PTP): Unicast (point to point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network.
SAS
SNTP(BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network.

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
Item Description
Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol.
IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588.
Advanced IRIG-B(Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface.
PPS(Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface.
When no time synchronization signal is connected to the equipment, please select
NoTimeSyn
this option and the alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.
“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by device, but “Advanced” mode
is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] may be
issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.
1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device
will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there
is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically
with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module，“SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal
[Alm_TimeSyn] being issued simultaneously.
3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without
NOTICE!
The clock message via IEC103 protocol is INVALID when the device receives the
IRIG-B signal through RC-485 port.
10. [IP_Server_SNTP]
It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to
the relay or BCU.
11. [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP]
Both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are inefffective unless SNTP clock

synchronization is valid.
When both [IP_Server_SNTP] and [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the

deivce receives broadcast SNTP synchronization message.
When either [IP_Server_SNTP] or [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] is set as “000.000.000.000”, the

deivce adopt the setting whose value is not equal to “000.000.000.000” as SNTP server address
and the deivce receives unicast SNTP synchronization message.
When neither [IP_Server_SNTP] nor [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] are set as “000.000.000.000”, the

deivce adopt the setting [IP_Server_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast SNTP
synchronization message. If the device does not receive the server responses after 30s, the
deivce adopt the setting [IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] as SNTP server address to receive unicast
SNTP synchronization message. The device will switch between [IP_Server_SNTP] and
[IP_StandbyServer_SNTP] repeatedly if the device always can not receive the server responses

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
waiting 30s.
12. [Opt_Display_Status]
If this setting is not configured, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value by default.
If this setting is set as “0”, the sampled values are displayed as primary value, if this setting is set
as “1”, the sampled values are displayed as secondary value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref), if
digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
13. [Opt_Display_Settings]
If this setting is not configured, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary value
by default. If this setting is set as “0”, the protection settings are set and displayed as primary
value, if this setting is set as “1”, the protection settings are set and displayed as secondary
value.
The primary voltage is converted into secondary voltage according to rated secondary voltage of
VT (i.e. the system setting [U2n_PP]), if digital sampling mode is adopted, the virtual rated
secondary voltage of VT is 100V by default. The primary current is converted into secondary
current according to rated secondary current of reference CT (i.e. the system setting [I2n_Ref]),
if digital sampling mode is adopted, the primary current is converted into secondary current
according to the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT.
14. [En_DualNet_GOOSE]
The setting is valid only when GOOSE is enabled. If single/double-net mode is enabled (i.e. the
setting is set as “1”), for the single-net connected signal, the related alarm signal of network B
will be shielded.
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings
7.3 Label Settings
 Setting list
No. Symbol Description
1 Name_Busx Label setting of busbar No.x
2 Name_Bayn Label setting of bay n
Following label settings are configured only for digital substation
3 Bm.Name_n_GCommLink Label setting of GOOSE communication link n of the GOOSE and

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
SV module that located in slot No.m
Label setting of SV communication link n of the GOOSE and SV

4 Bm.Name_n_SVCommLink
module that located in slot No.m
These settings are used to definite the label of each bay and busbar. They can be set by 6
characters at most. The label of each bay and busbar will influence the displayed contents of all
reports, settings and metering that related with each bay and busbar.
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupLabel Settings
7.4 Function Links
Function link is a special logic setting which is used to enable protection function. These function
links can be configured through local HMI or remote PC (controlled by the function link
[Link_RmtCtrlLink]).
Each function link is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection function is in
service. If the virtual binary input [Link_RmtCtrlLink] is set as “1”, through SAS or RTU, the
function link can be set as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant protection function can be in
service or out of service through remote command.
These function links provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service or out
of service remotely away from an unattended substation.
 Setting list
No. Symbol Remark
Enable remote setting modification. Set it as “0” if only local setting

modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote setting
1 Link_RmtChgSetting
modification are both needed.
If it is not configured for a project, its default value is “1”.
Enable remote active setting group modification. Set it as “0” if only

local active setting group modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local
2 Link_RmtChgGrp
and remote active setting group modification are both needed.
Enable remote function links modification. Set it as “0” if only local

function links modification is needed. Set it as “1” if local and remote
3 Link_RmtCtrlLink
function links modification are both needed.
Enable all protective functions. All the protective functions can be

enabled only when it is set as “1”. If it is set as “0”, all the protective
4 Link_Prot
functions is disabled.

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark

5 87B.Link
1: Enabling feeder breaker failure protection

6 50BF.Link
0: Disabling feeder breaker failure protection
1: Circuit breaker of bay n is in maintenance,

7 @Bayn.Link_Maintenance
0: Circuit breaker of bay n is not in maintenance
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is

input and function link of a protective element is configured according
8 Fdr.50DZ.Link
to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection
Function link of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it
9 @Bayn.50DZ.Link
1: Enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
0: Disabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n
Function link of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured

function link of a protective element is configured according to each
10 50SOTF.Link
bay” is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Function link of enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS

bay) (it is configured when the basic information configuration
11 @Bayn.50SOTF.Link configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable” (refer to Section
3.4))
1: Enabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
0: Disabling SOTF protection of bay n (only for BC/BS bay)
Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground

overcurrent protection (it is configured when the basic information
configuration “Enabling binary input and function link of a protective
element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Disable” (refer
12 50/51.Link to Section 3.4))
1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection and ground overcurrent
protection
13 @Bayn.50/51P.Link Function link of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark

1: Enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

14 @Bayn.50/51G.Link
1: Enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
0: Disabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n
Function link of enabling PD protection (it is configured when the basic

15 62PD.Link
Function link of enabling PD protection of bay n (it is configured when

the basic information configuration “Enabling binary input and function
link of a protective element is configured according to each bay” is set
16 @Bayn.62PD.Link
as “Enable” (refer to Section 3.4))
1: Two busbars are under inter-connected operation mode

17 Link_IntLinkx
0: Two busbars are not under inter-connected operation mode
Following function links are configured only for digital substation
1: Bay n is put into service.

18 @Bayn.Link_On 0: Bay n is out of service.
It is configured when digital sampling mode is adopted.
1: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is enabled. The

disconnector position will be decided by [@Bayn.Link_DS_BB1] and
[@Bayn.Link_DS_BB2];
19 @Bayn.Link_DS
0: Enforced disconnector position for bay n is disabled. The
disconnector position will be decided by disconnector position binary
input.

[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”;
20 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB1

21 @Bayn.Link_DS_BB2
[@Bayn.Link_DS] is set as “1”;

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
No. Symbol Remark

 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksFunction Links
7.5 System Settings
 Setting list
No. Item Setting Range Default Setting
1 Active_Grp 1~10 1
2 PrimaryEquip_Name Max 20 characters
3 fn 50Hz, 60Hz 50Hz
4 U1n_PP 1~1200kV 220kV
5 U2n_PP 1.00~200V 100V
6 Bayn.I1n 0~9999A 1200A
7 Bayn.I1n_CT1 0~9999A 1200A
8 Bayn.I1n_CT2 0~9999A 1200A
9 I1n_Ref 1~9999A 1200A
10 I2n_Ref 1A or 5A 1A
11 Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode 0, 1 0
12 Cfg_DS_BBx 00000000~01FFFFFE
1. [Active_Grp]
The number of active setting group, ten setting groups can be configured for busbar differential
protection and breaker failure protection, and only one is active at a time.
2. [PrimaryEquip_Name]
Name of the protected primary equipment, such as busbar, transformer, etc.
3. [U1n_PP]
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
4. [U2n_PP]
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage of VT.
5. [Bayn.I1n]
Rated primary current of the CT of bay n. It should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n] as a negative value.
6. [Bayn.I1n_CT1], [Bayn.I1n_CT2]
If there are two CTs available for bay n (such as a bus coupler with double CTs available),
[Bayn.I1n_CT1] and [Bayn.I1n_CT2] are the rated primary current of the two CTs of bay n. They
should be set as “0” if the corresponding bay is not used.
When digital sampling mode is adopted, the setting range will be “-9999A~9999A”, if the polarity
mark of CT1 or CT2 of bay n is wrong, it can be corrected by setting [Bayn.I1n_CT1] or
[Bayn.I1n_CT2] as a negative value.
7. [I1n_Ref]
Rated primary current of reference CT.
This setting is used in case that the rated CT primary currents of each feeder connected to busbar
are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If the maximum CT ratio is two times larger than the minimum CT ratio, in order to ensure accuracy,
the rated primary current of reference CT shall be half of the maximal rated primary current.
For example, assume only 3 feeders are connected to the busbar. The CT ratios are 600:5 (feeder
02), 600:5 (feeder 03) and 1200:5 (feeder 04). Then, this setting should be set as “600”.
8. [I2n_Ref]
The rated secondary current of reference CT. This setting is used in case that the rated secondary
current of each feeder connected to busbar are different. Among these CTs, the CT with the most
applied ratio is taken as the reference CT.
If digital sampling is adopted, it is the virtual rated secondary current of reference CT. It can be set
according to user’s habit. If the sampled values are displayed as secondary value, the primary
current are converted into secondary current according to it. If all the protection settings are set as
secondary value, users should set all the current settings according to it.
9. [Opt_UnearthedSys_Mode]
When PCS-915IC is applied to an unearthed system, it should be set as “1”. It will affect the
settings of voltage controlled element, please refer to Section 3.12.6 and Section 3.5.6, the
criterion of VT circuit supervision will also change, please refer to Section 3.14.
10. [Cfg_DS_BBx]
Disconnector position configuration setting of BBx. In the case of single busbar with bus section
arrangement, the setting is used to indicate which busbar zone the feeder is connected to. The
setting is consisted of 32 binary digits but 8 hexadecimal digits can be viewed through device LCD
screen. The definition of the system setting is as follows.

Date: 2015-03-07
7 Settings
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bay 16
Bay 14
Bay 13
Bay 12
Bay 10
Bay 09
Bay 08
Bay 07
Bay 06
Bay 05
Bay 04
Bay 03
Bay 02
Bay 01
Bay 11
Bay 5
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Bay 17
Bay 25
Bay 24
Bay 23
Bay 22
Bay 21
Bay 20
Bay 19
Bay 18
0
0
The feeder bay is connected to BBx if corresponding binary digit of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is set as “1”.
Generally, Bay 01 is connected with BC, so bit 0 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] is not used. For double-CT BC,
bay 01 and bay 02 will be occupied, so bit 0 and bit 1 of [Cfg_DS_BBx] are not used.
 Access path:
MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings
7.6 GOOSE Receiving Links
GOOSE receiving links will changed according to the specific project, so it is not listed here. Users
can see the GOOSE receiving links of each project via the PCS-Explorer software).
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Recv Links
7.7 GOOSE Sending Links
NOTICE!
In this section, “@Bayn” is used to refer to the label setting of bay n.
 Setting list
No. Symbol Remark
1 @Bayn.GLink_Send_Trp GOOSE sending link of tripping of bay n (n=1~23)
2 @Bayn.GLink_Send_TT GOOSE sending link of transfer tripping of bay n (n=2~23)
 Access Path:
MainMenuSettingsLogic LinksGOOSE Send Links

Date: 2015-03-07
Table of Contents
8 Human Machine Interface ................................................................ 8-a
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview .............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Functionality ......................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys ................................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.3 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ...................................................................... 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2 Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.4 Records .............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.6 Print .....................................................................................................................................8-11
8.2.7 Local Cmd .......................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.2.8 Information ......................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.9 Test..................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.10 Clock ................................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.2.11 Language ......................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3 Understand LCD Display .............................................................................. 8-16

8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation ...................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.3 Display When Tripping ....................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition ..................................................................................... 8-21
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes ..................................................................... 8-22

Date: 2014-09-20
8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-25
8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-26

8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values ............................................................................................ 8-26
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals ............................................................................................. 8-26
8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.4 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-27
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-28
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting ..................................................................................................... 8-30
8.4.7 Print Device Records ......................................................................................................... 8-31
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-32
8.4.9 Delete Records .................................................................................................................. 8-33
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-34
8.4.11 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-35
8.4.12 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-35
8.4.13 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-36
8.4.14 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-36
List of Figures
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis ......................................................................... 8-1
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel .................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M ................................................... 8-5
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915 ............................................................................................ 8-7
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram .................................................................... 8-17
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report ................................................................................ 8-18
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report ................................................... 8-19
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report ................................................................................ 8-21
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report ............................................................... 8-22
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report ..................................................................................... 8-25
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password............................................................................ 8-29

Date: 2014-09-20
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings.......................................................................... 8-30
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings...................................................................................... 8-31
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group .................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report.................................................................................... 8-34
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock ................................................................................. 8-35
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language ............................................................................ 8-37
List of Tables
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list ......................................................................................... 8-19
Table 8.3-2 Binary input list ...................................................................................................... 8-22
Table 8.3-3 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-25
PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 8-c

Date: 2014-09-20
8.1 Human Machine Interface Overview
The human-machine interface is implemented by human-machine interface (HMI) module

which includes the following components:
 A 320×240 backlight LCD visible in dim lighting conditions for monitoring status, fault
diagnostics and setting, etc.
 LED indicators on the front panel for denoting the status of this protection operation.
 A 9-key keypad on the front panel of the device for full access to the device.
1 11
5
HEALTHY
2 12
PCS-915
MISC ALM
3 13 BUSBAR RELAY
4 14
P
5 15
GR
6 16
ENT
7 17
C
ES
8 18
9 19
10 20
1 3 4
Figure 8.1-1 Typical front panel of 8U chassis
Indication No. Description
1 A 320×240 dots liquid crystal display
2 20 LED indicators
3 A 9-key keypad
4 A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC
5 Logo, device type and name
8.1.1 Functionality
 The HMI module helps to view activated LED or a report display on the LCD after an

Date: 2014-09-20
incident occurred.
 Operator is free to browse the data.
 Navigate through the menu commands to locate the interested data.
8.1.2 Keypad and Keys

The keypad and keys on the front panel of the device provide convenience to the operator to view
data or change the device’s setting.
The keypad contains nine keys with different function. Following figure shows the keypad and
keys.
P
+
GR
ENT
ESC
Figure 8.1-2 Keypad mounted on the front panel
No. Symbol Description
1 , , and , arrow buttons Move between selectable branches of the menu tree.
2 “+”, “-“ Change parameters or setting values.
3 ENT Provide Enter/Execute function.
4 GRP Setting Group selection.
5 ESC Exit the present level in the menu tree.
NOTICE!
Any setting change shall be confirmed by pressing “+”, “”, “”, “-“, “ENT” in
sequence.
Any report deletion shall be executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.
8.1.3 LED Indications

20 LED indicators are available for PCS-915, the 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom,
operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (MISC ALM), others are configurable, please refer to
Chapter 9 “Configurable Function” for details.
A brief explanation about some common LED indicators has been listed as bellow.
LED Display Description
When the device is out of service or any hardware error is detected

HEALTHY Off
during self-check.

Date: 2014-09-20
LED Display Description
Green Lit when the device is in service and ready for operation.
Off When device in normal operating condition.

MISC ALM
Yellow Lit when other abnormality occurs.
Off When the device is in normal operating condition.

CT/VT ALM
Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure or CT circuit failure occurs.

DS ALM
Yellow Lit when disconnector position is abnormal

BBP TRIP
Red Lit when busbar differential protection operates to trip.

BFP TRIP
Red Lit when breaker failure protection operates to trip.

MISC TRIP Lit when misc operation signal (Op_MISC) is issued. Please refer to
Red
Section 8.3.3.
 The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device again to restart the
relay.
 “xx ALM” LED is turned on when corresponding abnormalities mentioned above occurs
and turned off if the abnormalities are removed except for CT circuit failure alarm. CT
circuit failure alarm can be reset when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted
or energize the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg] or press “ESC” first then “ENT”
simultaneously
 The “xx TRIP” LED is turned on and latched once any protection element operates. The
“xx TRIP” LED can be turned off by energizing the resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg].
8.1.4 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port
as well as a twisted-pair ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is
applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.
P2
P1
P3

Date: 2014-09-20
Figure 8.1-3 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel
In the above figure and the following table:
P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.
P2: To connect the twisted-pair ethernet port of the computer.
P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.
The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.
Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable
Terminal Device side Computer side

Core color Function
No. (Left) (Right)
1 Orange & white TX+ of the ethernet port P1-1 P2-1
2 Orange TX- of the ethernet port P1-2 P2-2
3 Green & white RX+ of the ethernet port P1-3 P2-3
4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2
5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3
6 Green RX- for the ethernet port P1-6 P2-6
7 Blue & white P1-7
The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P3-5
8 Brown P1-8
8.1.5 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, takes NR1102M
as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-4. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.
The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)
after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the
protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address
and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)
PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”
The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)
If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled. If using
other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be set as “1”.

Date: 2014-09-20
NR1102M
ETHERNET
Network A
Network B
ETHERNET
Network C
Network D
SYN+
SYN-
SGND
RTS
TXD
SGND
Figure 8.1-4 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102M
8.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree
8.2.1 Overview
Pressing “▲” at any running interface can return to the main menu. Select different submenu by
“▲” and “▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the
previous menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For fast return to the command
menu, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Up to five
latest menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. by “first in first out” principle. It is
arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.
Press “▲” to enter the main menu, the interface is shown in the following diagram:

Date: 2014-09-20
Quick Menu
Language
Main Menu
If the protective device is powered for the first time, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲”
to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:
Language
Clock
Test
Information
Local Cmd
Print
Settings
Records
Status
Measurements

Date: 2014-09-20
Main Menu
Measurements Settings Local Cmd
Measurements1 System Settings Reset Target

Prot Settings Trig Oscillograph
Measured Values
Download
Phase Angle BBP Settings
Clear Counter
Cal Values 50DZ Settings
Confirm Disconnector
BC BFP Settings
Measurements2 Fdr BFP Settings
Measured Values SOTF Settings
Information
Phase Angle OC Settings
Cal Values PD Settings Version Info
Copy Settings Board Info
Logic Links
Status
Test
Function Links
Inputs GOOSE Send Links Device Test
Prot Inputs GOOSE Recv Links
Disturb Events
Bay Inputs Device Setup
All Test
Function Inputs Device Settings Select Test
Comm Settings
FD Inputs Superv Events
Label Settings
All Test
Bay Inputs
Print Select Test
Function Inputs
Device Info IO Events
GOOSE Inputs
Settings All Test
Contact Inputs
System Settings Select Test
Superv State Prot Settings GOOSE Testing
Prot Superv BBP Settings
Internal Signal
Prot Bay Superv 50DZ Settings
BC BFP Settings Zone Cal BI
Prot Misc Superv
Fdr BFP Settings
Disturb Items
FD Superv SOTF Settings
GOOSE Comm Counter
OC Settings
FD Bay Superv SV Comm Counter
PD Settings
FD Misc Superv
All Settings
GOOSE Superv
Logic Links Clock
SV Superv
MiscBrd Superv Function Links
GOOSE Send Links Language
Logic Links State GOOSE Recv Links
Function Links All Settings
GOOSE Send Links Device Setup
GOOSE Recv Links
Device Settings
Comm Settings
Label Settings
Records All Settings
Disturb Records All Settings

Superv Events Latest Chgd Settings
IO Events
Disturb Records
Device Logs
Superv Events
Clear Records
IO Events
Device Status
Waveforms
Diff Wave
Bay Wave 1
Bay Wave 2
Bay Wave 3
Bay Wave 4
Bay Wave 5
Bay Wave 6
IEC103 Info
Cancel Print
Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree of PCS-915

Date: 2014-09-20
Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.
This is the maximized menu of PCS-915, for a specific project, if some function is not available,
the corresponding submenu will hidden.
8.2.2 Measurements
This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and AC current sampled values of the protective
device. These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device.
This menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 5.2 about the details of
sampled values.
No. Item Description
1 Measurements1 Display sampled values on protection DSP module.
2 Measurements2 Display sampled values on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.2.1 Measurements1
The submenu “Measurements1” has following submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on protection DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on protection DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on protection DSP module.
8.2.2.2 Measurements2
The submenu “Measurements2” has following lower submenus.
1 Measured Values Display measured analog values on fault detector DSP module.
2 Phase Angle Display phase angles on fault detector DSP module.
3 Cal Values Display measured values for debugging on fault detector DSP module.
8.2.3 Status
This menu is used to display real time binary inputs and alarm signals of the protective device.
These data can help users to acquaint the operation condition of the protective device. This menu
comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section 8.3.5 about the details of binary inputs and
Section 4.5 about the details of alarm signals.
1 Inputs Display the status of binary inputs
2 Superv State Display the status of alarm signals
3 Logic Links State Display the status of logic links

Date: 2014-09-20
8.2.3.1 Inputs
The submenu “Inputs” has following submenus.
1 GOOSE Inputs Display the status of GOOSE binary inputs
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of protection DSP
2 Prot Inputs
module
Display the status of binary inputs that used for calculation of fault detector
3 FD Inputs
DSP module
Display the status of other binary inputs (such as time synchronizing binary
4 Contact Inputs input, printing binary input, maintenance binary input, resetting binary input
and opto binary inputs).
(1) The submenu “Prot Inputs” includes the following command menus.
1 Bay Inputs Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on protection DSP module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on protection DSP

2 Function Input
module.
(2) The submenu “FD Inputs” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of binary inputs about each bay on fault detector DSP
1 Bay Inputs
module.
Display the status of function enabling binary inputs on fault detector DSP
2 Function Input
module.
8.2.3.2 Superv State
The submenu “Superv State” has following submenus.
1 Prot Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on protection DSP module
2 FD Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP module
3 GOOSE Superv Display the status of GOOSE self-supervision signals
4 SV Superv Display the status of SV self-supervision signals
5 MiscBrd Superv Display the status of self-supervision signals of modules of process layer
The submenu “Prot Superv” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2014-09-20
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on protection

1 Prot Bay Superv
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on protection DSP

2 Prot Misc Superv
module.
The submenu “FD Superv” includes the following command menus.
Display the status of self-supervision signals about each bay on fault detector
1 FD Bay Superv
DSP module.
Display the status of other self-supervision signals on fault detector DSP

2 FD Misc Superv
module.
8.2.3.3 Logic Links State
The submenu “Logic Links State” has following submenus.
1 Function Links Display the status of function links.
2 GOOSE Send Links Display the status of GOOSE sending links.
3 GOOSE Recv Links Display the status of GOOSE receiving links.
8.2.4 Records
This menu displays protection tripping report, self-supervision report, binary input change report
and control report. The protective device can store 1024 pieces of recorders for each kind of report
in non-volatile memory.
1 Disturb Records View the tripping report
2 Superv Events View the self-supervision report
3 IO Events View the binary input change report
4 Device Logs View the control report
5 Clear Records Clear all the device records
8.2.5 Settings
This submenu is used to browse, modify and set all settings including device settings,
communication parameters, label settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings and
protection settings.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.

Date: 2014-09-20
No. Item Function description
1 System Settings Set the system settings
2 Prot Settings Set the protection settings
3 Logic Links Includes function links and GOOSE links
4 Device Setup Set the settings related to device setup
8.2.5.1 Device Setup
The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Set the device settings
2 Comm Settings Set the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Set the label settings of each protected element.
8.2.5.2 Logic Links
The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
1 Function Links Set the function links.
2 GOOSE Send Links Set the GOOSE sending links.
3 GOOSE Recv Links Set the GOOSE receiving links.
8.2.5.3 Prot Settings
The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 BBP Settings Set the settings about busbar differential protection
2 50DZ Settings Set the settings about dead zone fault protection
3 BC BFP Settings Set the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
4 Fdr BFP Settings Set the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
5 SOTF Settings Set the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
6 OC Settings Set the settings about overcurrent protection
7 PD Settings Set the settings about pole disagreement protection
8 Copy Settings To copy protection settings from one group to another group
8.2.6 Print
This menu is used to print the self-supervision report, binary input change report, waveform and
the information related with settings, fault report and 103 protocol, and so on.
This menu includes the command menus and submenus as follows:

Date: 2014-09-20
1 Device Info Print the description information of protective device.
Print settings, includes device settings, communication parameters, label

settings, function links, GOOSE links, system settings, and protection
2 Settings
settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all settings
of the device. Besides, it can also print out the latest changed setting item.
3 Disturb Records Print trip reports.
4 Superv Events Print self-check alarm and device operation abnormal alarm reports.
5 IO Events Print status change of binary signal.
6 Device Status Print all the values measured by the device
7 Waveforms Print recorded waveforms.
Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN), information

8 IEC103 Info serial number (INF), general classification service group number, and
channel number (ACC).
9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command
8.2.6.1 Settings
The submenu “Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 System Settings Print the system settings.
2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings
3 Logic Links Print the function links or GOOSE links
4 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup
Print the content of all settings including device setups, system settings,
5 All Settings
protection settings and logic links.
6 Latest Chgd Settings Print the content of the latest changed setting
(1) The submenu “Device Setup” includes the following command menus.
1 Device Settings Print the device settings.
2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.
3 Label Settings Print the label settings of protective device.
4 All Settings Print all the settings related to device setup
(2) The submenu “Logic Links” includes the following command menus.
1 Function Links Print the function links.
2 GOOSE Send Links Print the GOOSE sending links.

Date: 2014-09-20
3 GOOSE Recv Links Print the GOOSE receiving links.
4 All Settings Print the all the logic links
(3) The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.
1 BBP Settings Print the settings about busbar differential protection
2 50DZ Settings Print the settings about dead zone fault protection
3 BC BFP Settings Print the settings about BC/BS breaker failure protection
4 Fdr BFP Settings Print the settings about feeder breaker failure protection
5 SOTF Settings Print the settings about switch-onto-fault protection
6 OC Settings Print the settings about overcurrent protection
7 PD Settings Print the settings about pole disagreement protection
8 All Settings Print the all the protection settings
8.2.6.2 Waveforms
The submenu “Waveforms” has following submenus.
1 Diff Wave To print differential current waveforms and busbar voltage waveforms
2 Bay Wave 1 To print current waveforms of Bay 01~04
8.2.7 Local Cmd

This menu is used to reset the latched tripping relay, protection device signal lamp and LCD
display. It can record the currently acquired waveform of the protection device under normal
condition for printing and uploading to substation automatic system (SAS). Besides, it can send
out the request of program download and clear the communication statistic information about
GOOSE, SV and optical fibre.
This menu includes the following command menus.
1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD display.
2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording.
3 Download Send out the download request.

Date: 2014-09-20
4 Clear Counter Clear the communication statistic information about GOOSE and SV
5 Confirm Disconnector Confirm the disconnector position
8.2.8 Information
In this menu the LCD displays current working state of each intelligent module and software
information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module.
Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,
1 Version Info which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and
management sequence number.
2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
8.2.9 Test
This menu is used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the device.
It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the communication
test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the SAS without
any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the backstage,

1 Device Test including tripping, self-check and binary signal transmission. It can realize
the transmission of messages of different classification.
Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit and
2 Internal Signal
relevant information about each protected bay
3 Disturb Items Check the fault report one by one.
4 GOOSE Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of GOOSE
5 SV Comm Counter Display the communication statistic information of SV
8.2.9.1 Device Test
The submenu “Device Test” has following submenus.
View the relevant information about tripping report (only used for debugging
1 Disturb Events
persons)
View the relevant information about alarm report (only used for debugging
2 Superv Events
persons)
View the relevant information about binary input change report (only used
3 IO Events
for debugging persons)

Date: 2014-09-20
View the relevant information about GOOSE (only used for debugging
4 GOOSE Testing
persons)
The submenu “Disturb Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements
2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification
The submenu “Superv Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions
The submenu “IO Events” includes the following command menus.
1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs
8.2.9.2 Internal Signal
The submenu “Internal Signal” has following submenus.
1 Zone Cal BI Display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit
The submenu “Zone Cal BI” will display the calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential
circuit. It can help users to know the current composition of differential current. If the value of the
calculated virtual binary input of bay n for differential circuit is “1”, it means that the current of bay n
is included in differential current.
Item Description
@Bayn.VBI_CZ Calculated binary input of bay n for check zone differential circuit
Calculated binary input of bay n for discriminating zone differential circuit of

@Bayn.VBI_DZ_@BBx
BBx
Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
@Bayn.VBI_CT1_CZ
for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for check zone differential circuit (only
@Bayn.VBI_CT2_CZ
for double-CTs BC/BS)
Calculated binary input of CT1 of bay n for discriminating zone differential

@Bayn.VBI_CT1_DZ_@BBx
circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
@Bayn.VBI_CT2_DZ_@BBx Calculated binary input of CT2 of bay n for discriminating zone differential

Date: 2014-09-20
circuit of BBx (only for double-CTs BC/BS)
8.2.10 Clock
The time of internal clock can be viewed in “Clock” option. The time is displayed in the form
YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.
8.2.11 Language
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language.
8.3 Understand LCD Display
8.3.1 Overview
There are five kinds of LCD display, system topology if the protective device is under the normal
condition, tripping reports, alarm reports, binary input changing reports and control reports.
Tripping reports and alarm reports will be continuously displayed until operators energizing the
resetting binary input [BI_RstTarg]. User can press “ESC” first then “ENT” simultaneously to switch
view of trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display. Binary change reports will be displayed
before returning to the previous display interface automatically. Control reports will not pop up and
can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding menu.
8.3.2 Display during Normal Operation

After the protection device is powered and enters initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization, the “HEALTHY” indicator of
the protection device goes out.
Under normal condition, the LCD will display the interface similar as Figure 8.3-1. For different
busbar arrangements, the displayed interfaces are different. The LCD displays in white color
backlight which is activated if there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished automatically
after 60 seconds without any operation.

Date: 2014-09-20
Data and time of equipment clock
Communication address Addr:098 2010-09-28 10:10:00 Group:01 Active group number
Label of BB No.1
Fdr01 Fdr03 Fdr05 Fdr07 Label of each feeder
Label of BC BC
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.00A Phase-A current of each feeder
Phase-A current of BC 0.01A
Disconnector (Closed)
BB1
Bus Coupler
means BC is open BB2
Disconnector (Open)
means BC is closed
0.01A 0.01A 0.00A 0.01A
Fdr02 Fdr04 Fdr06 Fdr08
Label of BB No.2
Three-phase voltage of BB No.1 U1: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase voltage of BB No.2 U2: 57.70V 57.70V 57.70V
Three-phase differential current DI: 0.00A 0.00A 0.01A
Figure 8.3-1 LCD display of single line diagram
The middle part of Figure 8.3-1 displays the single line diagram of busbar with feeders whose CT
correction coefficient is not zero. The label of each feeder (at most 6 digits or characters, please
refer to label settings in Section 7.3) and feeder current is shown by the side of the corresponding
feeder. System frequency (Freq), three-phase busbar voltages (Ux), check zone differential
current (DI), discriminating zone differential current of BBx (DIx) may be shown under the single
line diagram (x=1, 2, 3 or 4).
If the protective device receives the IRIG-B signal for time synchronization and can correctly
decode it, “S” will be displayed on the top left corner of LCD.
If all feeders can not displayed in one page, the single line diagram will move automatically and
circularly from right to left if no key is pressed, and will move to left quickly by pressing key “◄”
continuously, move to right quickly by pressing key “►” continuously.
The displayed content contains: the realtime date and time of the protection device (with a format
of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), realtime valid setting group number, three-phase current and voltage
sampling values on each side and differential current etc.
8.3.3 Display When Tripping

This protection device can store 32 fault reports and 32 fault waveforms. When there is protection
element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report. PCS-915IC can
provide two different LCD display interfaces based on the availability of self-check report.
As shown in Figure 8.3-2, if the self-check report is not provided, the display interface will only
show the fault report.

Date: 2014-09-20
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip
0000ms Pkp_FD
0006ms A 87B.Op_TrpBB1_DPFC
BC Fdr02 Fdr03 Fdr06
Fdr08
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max 1.05A
Figure 8.3-2 LCD display 1 of trip report
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip: shows the SOE number, the time when fault detector
picks up (the format is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond) and the title of the
report.
0000ms Pkp_FD shows the fault detector of protection element and the
operation time of fault detector is fixed at 0ms.

Fdr08 shows the relative operation time of protection element,
protection elements and trip elements.
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC shows the relative operation time and operation element
of protection element
Id_max 1.05A shows the maximum differential current
If the fault report and the self-check alarm report occur simultaneously, as shown in Figure 8.3-2,
the upper half part on the screen is fault report, and the lower half part is self-check report. The
fault report includes fault report number, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format
of year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond), protection element and tripping element.
If there is protection element, the relative time will be displayed on the basis of fault detector
element and fault phase. If the upper half part on the screen is not big enough to list all the
protection elements and tripping elements, the report will be automatically displayed in a cycle
without pressing any key on the front panel.
The displayed content of the lower half part is the alarm element. If the alarm element is more than
one, all the alarm elements will be displayed in a cycle.

Date: 2014-09-20
NO.005 2010-04-28 07:10:00:200 Trip
0000ms Pkp_FD
Fdr08
0006ms 87B.Op_TrpBC
Id_max 1.05A
Superv Events
Alm_Maintenance
Figure 8.3-3 LCD display 2 of trip report and alarm report
All the trip information are listed in the following tables:
1. Operation elements
Table 8.3-1 Operation elements list
1 87B.Op_Dly1_Biased Stage 1 of backup protection operates.
2 87B.Op_Dly2_Biased Stage 2 of backup protection operates.
3 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
4 87B.Op_Trp@BBx_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
5 87B.Op_A_Dly1_Biased Phase-A stage 1 of backup protection operates.
6 87B.Op_B_Dly1_Biased Phase-B stage 1 of backup protection operates.
7 87B.Op_C_Dly1_Biased Phase-C stage 1 of backup protection operates.
8 87B.Op_A_Dly2_Biased Phase-A stage 2 of backup protection operates.
9 87B.Op_B_Dly2_Biased Phase-B stage 2 of backup protection operates.
10 87B.Op_C_Dly2_Biased Phase-C stage 2 of backup protection operates.
11 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-A steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
12 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-B steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
13 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_Biased Phase-C steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
14 87B.Op_A_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-A DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
15 87B.Op_B_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-B DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
16 87B.Op_C_Trp@BBx_DPFC Phase-C DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip BBx.
17 87B.Op_Biased Steady-state busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

Date: 2014-09-20
18 87B.Op_DPFC DPFC busbar differential protection operates to trip any busbar.

19 87B.Op_Trp@BBx
protection operates to trip BBx.

20 87B.Op
protection operates to trip any busbar.
Busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC or BS

21 87B.Op_Trp@Bayn
bay).
Phase-A busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

22 87B.Op_A_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
Phase-B busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

23 87B.Op_B_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
Phase-C busbar differential protection operates to trip bay n (only for BC

24 87B.Op_C_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
25 @Bayn.50DZ.Op Dead zone fault protection of bay n operates.
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n

26 @Bayn.Op_TT
operates to initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker.
27 @Bayn.50SOTF.Op_Trp SOTF protection of bay n operates (only for BC or BS bay).
28 @Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp Phase overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
29 @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp Ground overcurrent protection of bay n operates.
30 @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp Pole disagreement protection of bay n operates.
31 50BF.Op_Trp@BBx Breaker failure protection operates to trip BBx.
Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip busbar zone (includes

32 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBB
BC/BS bay and feeder bay).
33 @Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to trip BC/BS.
34 @Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp Breaker failure protection of bay n operates to re-trip the breaker.
Breaker failure protection operates to trip breaker of bay n (only for BC

35 50BF.Op_Trp@Bayn
or BS bay).
BC/BS breaker failure protection or feeder breaker failure protection

36 50BF.Op
operates.
Misc operation signal, it can be used to trigger LED indicator (MISC

TRIP). The signal will be issued if any of following operation signals is
issued: 87B.Op_Trp@BCy, 87B.Op_Trp@BSz, @Bayn.Op_TT,
@BCy.50SOTF.Op_Trp, @BSz.50SOTF.Op_Trp,
37 Op_Misc
@Bayn.50/51P.Op_Trp, @Bayn.50/51G.Op_Trp, @Bayn.62PD.Op_Trp,
@BCy.50BF.Op_TrpBB, @BSz.50BF.Op_TrpBB,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_TrpBC, @Bayn.50DZ.Op, 50BF.Op_Trp@BCy,
@Bayn.50BF.Op_ReTrp, 50BF.Op_Trp@BSz.
38 Op_Prot Any of protective element operates.

Date: 2014-09-20
39 Op_Prot_Latched Any of protective element operates (latched signal).
40 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.
41 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
42 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely.
43 BI_TrigDFR Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input.
Sampled values of Bx (GOOSE and SV module that located in slot No.x)

44 Bx.TrigDFR_DataErr_SV
errors to trigger waveform recording function
2. Trip elements
1 @Bayn Trip circuit breaker of bay n
Dead zone fault protection or breaker failure protection of bay n operates to

2 @Bayn.Op_TT
initiate transfer trip to remote circuit breaker
8.3.4 Display under Abnormal condition

This protection device can store 1024 self-check reports. During the running of protection device,
the self-check report of hardware errors or system running abnormity will be displayed
immediately.
Superv Events NO.26

2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
Alm_Maintenance 0 1
Figure 8.3-4 LCD display of alarm report
Superv Events shows the title of the report
Alm_Maintenance shows the content of abnormality alarm
If view the corresponding alarm report from the submenu “Superv Events” under the menu of

Date: 2014-09-20
“Records”, the SOE number and the real time of the report will be indicated in the alarm report.
All the alarm elements have been listed in Chapter “Supervision”.
8.3.5 Display When Binary Input Status Changes

If the status of any binary changes or any logic link is modified, as shown in Figure 8.3-5, a new
report on the state changes will be automatically displayed on LCD. PCS-915 can store 1024
binary input change reports. During the running of the device, the signals will be displayed at the
moment when the its state changes.
IO Events NO.26
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500ms
87B.BI_En 0 1
Figure 8.3-5 Display of binary input change report
IO Events NO.26 shows the number and the title of the report
2010-04-29 09:18:47:500 shows the date and time of the report occurred, the format is
year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
87B.BI_En 0->1 shows the state change of binary input, including the binary input
name and the original state and final state
All the binary inputs are listed in the following tables:
Table 8.3-2 Binary input list
1 BI_TimeSyn Binary input of time synchronization pulse
2 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
Binary input of blocking communication between equipment and

3 BI_Maintenance
substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit (RTU).
4 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.

Date: 2014-09-20
5 87B.BI_ExtBlk External binary input of blocking busbar differential protection
7 @Bayn.62PD.BI_PD Binary input indicating breaker of bay n is in pole disagreement status
8 @Bayn.BI_BFI Three-phase breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
9 @Bayn.BI_A_BFI Phase-A breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
10 @Bayn.BI_B_BFI Phase-B breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
11 @Bayn.BI_C_BFI Phase-C breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
12 @Bayn.BI_ChkBFI Common breaker failure initiation binary input of bay n
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element of breaker failure

13 50BF.BI_RlsVCE
protection
16 @Bayn.BI_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
17 @Bayn.BI_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker of bay n
18 @Bayn.BI_A_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
19 @Bayn.BI_B_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
20 @Bayn.BI_C_52a Normally open auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay n
21 @Bayn.BI_A_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-A of the circuit breaker of bay n
22 @Bayn.BI_B_52b Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-B of the circuit breaker of bay n
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase-C of the circuit breaker of bay

23 @Bayn.BI_C_52b
n
24 @Bayn.BI_89a_Byp_@BBx Normally open auxiliary contact of transfer bus disconnector of bay n
25 BI_ConfirmDS Disconnector position confirm binary input
26 BI_TrigDFR Trigger waveform recording binary input
27 87B.BI_En Binary input of enabling busbar differential protection
28 87B.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling busbar differential protection
Binary input indicating that two busbars are under the inter-connected
29 BI_En_IntLinkx
operation mode, if it is not configured, its default value is “0”
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection (it is configured
30 Fdr.50DZ.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling feeder dead zone fault protection of bay n (it is
31 @Bayn.50DZ.BI_En
32 50DZ.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder dead zone fault protection

Date: 2014-09-20
Binary input of enabling BC/BS SOTF protection (it is configured when the
33 50SOTF.BI_En
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BCy (it is configured when the basic
34 @BCy.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
(refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling SOTF of BSz (it is configured when the basic
35 @BSz.50SOTF.BI_En
protective element is configured according to each bay” is set as “Enable”
(refer to Section 3.4))
36 50SOTF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling BC/BS SOTF protection
Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection (it is configured when the

37 50/51.BI_En
Binary input of enabling phase overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

38 @Bayn.50/51P.BI_En
Binary input of enabling ground overcurrent protection of bay n (it is

39 @Bayn.50/51G.BI_En
40 50/51.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling overcurrent protection
Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection (it is configured

41 62PD.BI_En
function link of a protective element is configured according to each bay”
is set as “Disable” (refer to Section 3.4))
Binary input of enabling pole disagreement protection of bay n (it is

42 @Bayn.62PD.BI_En
43 62PD.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling pole disagreement protection
44 50BF.BI_En Binary input of enabling feeder breaker failure protection
45 50BF.BI_Blk Binary input of disabling feeder breaker failure protection
Binary input indicating BC/BS breaker is used to substitute one of feeder

46 BI_En_BC_Byp
breakers
47 BI_En_RevCT_Byp Reverse the polarity mark of BC/BS CT when BC/BS breaker is used to

Date: 2014-09-20
substitute one of feeder breakers
8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This protection device can store 1024 pieces of the control report (i.e. user operating reports).
During the running of the protection device, the running report will be displayed after any operation
is conducted.
Device Logs NO.4

2010-04-29 10:18:47:569ms
Settings_Chgd
Figure 8.3-6 Display of control report
Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the report
2010-04-29 10:18:47:569 shows the date and the time when the report is created, the format
is year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond
Settings_Chgd shows the state content of the user operation report.
User operating information listed below may be displayed.
Table 8.3-3 User operating event list
No. Message Description
1 Reboot The protective device has been reboot.
2 Reset_Target The protective device has been reset.
3 Settings_Chgd The settings of protective device have been changed.
4 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.
5 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (User operating event can not be deleted)
6 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.
7 Process_Exit A subprocess has exited.

Date: 2014-09-20
No. Message Description
8 Fail_Setting_OvRange Any setting value is out of setting scope.
9 Alm_CommTest The relay is in test mode.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and the designing

10 Fail_BoardConfig
drawing of an applied-specific project.
11 FD.Pkp Fault detector picks up.
12 TrigDFR_Man Waveform recording function is triggered manually.
13 TrigDFR_BI Waveform recording function is triggered by corresponding binary input
14 TrigDFR_Rmt Waveform recording function is triggered remotely
8.4 Keypad Operation
8.4.1 View Device Sampled Values

The operation is as follows:
1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then
press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu).
8.4.2 View Status of binary signals

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press
“ENT” to enter submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).
6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).

Date: 2014-09-20
8.4.3 View Device Records

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
key “ENT” to enter the submenu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to page up/down.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
7. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu).
For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu “Disturb Items”, and
the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report. The item fault report can
save up to 1024 events.
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Disturb Items”,
and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record.
5. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Test” menu).
8.4.4 View Device Setting

Follow the steps below to view the device settings:
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
“ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.

Date: 2014-09-20
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).
NOTICE!
If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side
of the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu
and the relative location of information where the current cursor points at.
8.4.5 Modify Device Setting

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor.
5. Press the key “+” or “-” to page up/down.
7. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” ).
8. Select the command menu “Device Settings”, “Label Settings”, or “Comm

Settings”, users need to enter the submenu “Device Setup” firstly. Select the
command menu “BBP Settings”, “50DZ Settings”, “BC BFP Settings”, “Fdr BFP
Settings”, “SOTF Settings”, “OC Settings” or “PD Settings”, users need to enter the
submenu “Prot Settings” firstly. Select the command menu “Function Links”,
“GOOSE Send Links” or “GOOSE Recv Links”, users need to enter the submenu
“Logic Links” firstly.
Following takes modification of system settings as an example.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “System
Settings”, and then press “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Move the cursor to the setting item to be modified, and then press the key “ENT”.
5. Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is multi-bit, press
the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to
modify the value), press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. Press the key “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command

Date: 2014-09-20
menu “System Settings”).
6. Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are
modified, press the key “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”.
Directly press the “ESC” or press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the
“Cancel”, and then press the key “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to
the displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”).
7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the key “ENT”, all
modified setting item will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Settings”).
8. Press the key “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the key
“ENT”, the LCD will display password input interface.
Password:
Figure 8.4-1 Display of inputting password
9. Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue
inputting it, then press “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is
correct, LCD will display “Save Settings…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the
displayed interface of the command menu “System Settings”). The device setting
modification is completed.
NOTICE!
The above modification instructions are available for all setting items.
NOTICE!
After modifying the settings in menu “System Settings” or “Prot Settings”, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will
automatically restart and re-check the settings. The device will be blocked until the
check process is finished. If selecting the command menu of protection element such
as “BBP Settings”, the LCD will display the following interface:

Date: 2014-09-20
2. BBP Settings
Please Select Group for Config
Active Group: 01
Selected Group: 01
Figure 8.4-2 Display 1 of modifying settings
Then move the cursor to the modified value and press “ENT” to enter. For example, if the setting
[87B.I_Bias] need to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter and the LCD will display the interface
shown in Figure 8.4-3. Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value and then press the “ENT” to enter.
87B.I_Pkp
Current Value 5.00
Modified Value 005.00
Min Value 0.05
Max Value 20.00
Figure 8.4-3 Display 2 of modifying settings
10. If selecting the other menus, move the cursor to the setting to be modified, and then
press the “ENT”.
8.4.6 Copy Protection Setting

1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu;

Date: 2014-09-20
2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the
key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Protection
Settings”, and then press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the command menu;
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”,
and then press the key “ENT” to enter the menu. The following display will be shown on
LCD.
Copy Settings
Active Group: 01
Copy To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-4 Display of copy settings
Press the key “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the key “ESC”, and return to the
menu “Settings”. Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input,
if the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, press the key “ESC” to exit the
password input interface and return to the menu “Settings”. If the password is correct,
the LCD will display “Copy Settings Success!”, and exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
8.4.7 Print Device Records

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
 Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then
Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,

Date: 2014-09-20
the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task
and re-start it for printing, the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC”
to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
 Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the
key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and
ending numbers of printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the
menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).
4. If selecting the command menu “IEC103 Info”, “Device Status” or “Device Info”, press
the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu
(returning to the menu “Print”).
5. If selecting the “Settings”, press “ENT” or “►” to enter the submenu.
6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and
then press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. To select items to print:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to print. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu
“Settings”).
7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the printed
waveform and press “ENT” to enter. With waveform data existing:
Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”,
the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to
the menu “Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and
re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to
exit this menu (returning to the menu “Waveforms”). If there is no any waveform data,
the LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”.
8.4.8 Switch Setting Group

1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “GRP”.

Date: 2014-09-20
Change Active Group
Active Group: 01
Change To Group: 02
Figure 8.4-5 Display of switching setting group
Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the main menu). After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display the password
input interface. If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the key “ESC” to
exit the password input interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the
“HEALTHY” indicator of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check
the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check
is successful, the LCD will return to its original state.
8.4.9 Delete Records

1. Exit the main menu.
2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and key “ENT”; Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu
(returning to the original state). Press the key “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

Date: 2014-09-20
Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit
Figure 8.4-6 Display of deleting report
NOTICE!
The operation of deleting report will delete all messages except for user operation
reports (i.e. control reports), including tripping reports, alarm reports and binary input
change reports. The deleted reports are IRRECOVERABLE, so the function shall be
used with great cautious.
8.4.10 Modify Device Clock

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the key
“ENT” to enter clock display.

Date: 2014-09-20
Clock
Year: 2010
Month: 04
Day: 28
Hour: 20
Minute: 59
Second: 14
Figure 8.4-7 Display of modifying clock
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified.
4. Press the key “＋” or “－”, to modify value, and then press the key “ENT” to save the
modification and return to the main menu.
5. Press the key “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.
8.4.11 View Module Information

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.12 Check Software Version

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press
the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

Date: 2014-09-20
4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
5. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).
8.4.13 Communication Test

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key
3. Select the command menu “Disturb Events”, “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, users
need to enter the submenu “Device Test” firstly.
4. Select any command menu (takes “Disturb Events” as an example), press the key
“ENT”, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.
5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down,
and then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the
corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication
test of this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the
corresponding fault report, and view the fault report produced by communication test in
the command menu “Disturb Items”.
6. If “All Test” is selected, press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of all
protection element one by one, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive all the
fault report.
NOTICE!
If selecting the “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, the substation automatic system can
receive the corresponding self-check report or binary signals, and the self-check report
or binary signals produced by communication test can also be viewed by the two
command menus of “Superv Events” and “IO Events” in the menu “Records”.
8.4.14 Select Language

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Language” menu, then press “ENT”
to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.

Date: 2014-09-20
Please Select Language:
1 中文
2 English
Figure 8.4-8 Display of selecting language
3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the preferred language and press the key
“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will
return to the main menu, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press “ESC” to
cancel language switching and return to the main menu.
NOTICE!
The LCD interfaces provided in this chapter are only for references and available for
explaining specific definition of LCD. The actual displayed interfaces maybe different
from these.

Date: 2014-09-20

Date: 2014-09-20
Table of Contents
9 Configurable Function ...................................................................... 9-a
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software ........................................................ 9-1
9.3 Device Setup.................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.1 Device Information ............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration ....................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3.3 MOT ..................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.4 Function Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9-4
9.4 Program Configuration ................................................................................... 9-5

9.4.1 LED Configuration ............................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO .................................................................................................. 9-7
9.5 Setting Configuration ................................................................................... 9-10

9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection .......................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.2 Browsing Settings ...............................................................................................................9-11
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings ...................................................................................9-11
List of Figures
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information .................................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration........................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface ................................................................................. 9-4
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface.......................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group......................................................................................... 9-10
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command .......................................................................... 9-11
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box ......................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value ......................................................................................... 9-12

Date: 2014-07-02

Date: 2014-07-02
By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make function configuration, binary input and
binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and setting configuration for PCS-915IC.
9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer Software
PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as
the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to
govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet
connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading
configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it
also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand. Please refer to Instruction
Manual of PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software for details and other functions.
Overall functions:
 Function configuration (off-line function)
 Programmable logic (off-line function)
 LED indicators configuration (off-line function)
 Binary input signals configuration (off-line function)
 Binary output signals configuration (off-line function)
 Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)
 Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)
 Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)
 Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)
 File downloading/uploading (on-line function)
9.3 Device Setup
Click “Device Config”→“Device Setup” node, and four labels are displayed in the edit window.
These labels are used to set device information, configure hardware module, configure the
software and hardware related function according to the selected series number of MOT and
configure ancillary protection functions respectively.
9.3.1 Device Information
Select “Device Information” page to view the basic information of the device. All these information

Date: 2014-07-02
are default settings in the selected driver package for creating the device. Part of the basic
information can be modified including “Project Name”, “User File Version” and “User Modify Time”.
Figure 9.3-1 Setting device information
9.3.2 Hardware Configuration
Select page “Hardware Configuration” and configure hardware modules according to the project
requirements.
There are four columns information shown in this page, they are “Slot” (slot number), “Name” (the
selectable module name), “Current Type” (currently selected module type) and “Description”
(module description). The modules of which the currently selected module type are grey are not
configurable.
1. Slot: To simplify hardware configuration, the slot number of PCS series is defined to start with
slot 01 from left to right in rear view of device.
4U device:
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
8U device:
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
8U+4U device:
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 P1
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Date: 2014-07-02
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 P2
In the table, NR1301 located in slot P1 (and P2) is power supply, NR1102 located in slot 01 is
MON module, and others are functional modules.
2. Name: The selectable module name is fixed in a program, normally, the module name implies
its function, such as BIO means the module can be configured as a binary input module or a
binary output module.
3. Current Type: Current module type is also marked on the aluminum base where the module is
fixed on. In this column, two types of modules can be observed: mandatory and optional. As
shown in the figure below, cells in “Current Type” column marked in grey are mandatory
modules which are necessary for device normal operation, the module type is fixed. Other
cells marked in white are optional modules which can be configured according to the
application. It is convenient to change the type of optional modules by clicking the optional
module, and select the module type in the pull-down menu or select “none” to leave the slot
blank if not required.
4. Description: Module description includes the functions and parameters of the selected
module.
Figure 9.3-2 Hardware module configuration
9.3.3 MOT
Choose “MOT” page to enter MOT configuration interface as shown below. According to the
selected series number of MOT, the applied busbar arrangement, some software and hardware
related function can be configured. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.3.

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.3-3 MOT configuration interface
9.3.4 Function Configuration
Choose “Function Configuration” page to enter function configuration interface as shown below
(the content may vary subject to created projects). Click the pull-down list in “Option” column to
perform function configuration. For detailed function configuration, please refer to Section 3.2.

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.3-4 Function configuration interface
9.4 Program Configuration
9.4.1 LED Configuration
On front panel of PCS-915, two columns of indicators are normally provided. The first two
indicators indicate device running status (Healthy) and alarm status (Alarm). Remaining indicators
have their specific meanings according to device functions (please refer to corresponding project
configuration manual for details). Colors of these indicators may vary with functions of device.
The control of these indicators is configured by LED element configuration in PCS-Explorer.
Click “Program Config”→“Slot01:CPU” node, and select “LED” page to view and configure LED
element.
The following is an example of LED configuration:

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-1 Example of LED configuration
If the LED symbol and the connected input block are in blue, indicating that they cannot be
modified. For some fixed configuration, the necessary functions not allowed to change will be
marked in blue, even the attributes cannot be modified.
The indicators not in blue can be defined according to the application. The method is very simple:
Double click LED element to open its attributes setup window. users can see that it consists of 4
sub-pages. Switch to “Func Block Parameter” sub-page. Here, indicators LED3~20 can be set.
Each indicator has two items to be set: Parameter “ledx_latched” (x=3~20): click corresponding
entry under “Set Value” to select “yes” or “no”. If “yes” is selected, indicator attribute is “latched”,
indicating that after this indicator is lit, it will remain on even the initiation signal disappears until it
is reset. If “no” is selected, indicator attribute is “un-latched”, indicating that the indicator status will
follow the change of its initiation signal.
The other parameter is “ledx_color” (x=3~20): The color of indicator can be selected as required:
green, yellow, and red.
After completion of setup, click “OK” to close attributes setup window. The set parameters will be
displayed on the element, as shown below.

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-2 LED indicators configuration interface
Next, indicators initiation signals should be placed on the page and connect them to corresponding
input interfaces of LED element: select the output signal from the “Source” tab at the right side of
the window to be used as input source. Press and hold left button of mouse, and directly drag it to
the page. When this signal passes input signal connection point, a red dot will appear to prompt
connection. After placing it at a suitable position, connection line will be automatically generated to
connect this input signal.
9.4.2 Configuration of BI and BO
PCS-915IC is normally configured with a number of IO modules. Quantities may vary with different
project.
These BI and BO modules are normally configured according to general configuration.

Corresponding modules are usually selected according to the application. However, in some
cases, addition of IO modules may be required according to the changing requirements. At this
time, configuration of signals and parameters of additional IO modules is required. After creation of
a device using the template driver package by PCS-Explorer, required configuration can be
performed on editable page.
9.4.2.1 Configuration of BI
Takes BI module in slot No.5 as an example.
Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot05:BIO_2”, one page node: “NR1506A_A”
is shown.

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.4-3 Module nodes and pages in program configuration
Click the page “NR1506A_A”; NR1506AS configuration graph is shown in an editing window.
Figure 9.4-4 Configuration graph of NR1506AS
In the graph, NR1506AS plug-in module symbol and respective output signals are shown with
connection to output symbol block.
Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1506AS input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1506AS module, and name or function of each pin
is described in the “BI_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their output signals to form
output symbol blocks.

Date: 2014-07-02
[BI_COMMON] of BI module is an internal binary input, it will be energized if any other binary input
of the BI module is energized. When users configure BFI binary input via PCS-Explorer auxiliary
software by themselves, all the common BFI binary inputs ([@Bayn.BI_ChkBFI]) of related bays
must be configured to [BI_COMMON] of the BI module, so if any BFI binary input of a BI module is
energized, the common BFI binary inputs of related bays are energized (refer to Section 3.12.2.2).
On the element symbol, two parameters columns of symbols “ ” and “ ”. The former
indicates BI delay pick up time and the latter indicates BI delay drop off time. If voltage applied
between a BI input and the common terminal exceeds the BI delay pick up time, corresponding
output signal will be energized, and if the applied voltage is disappeared for a period exceeding
the BI delay drop off time, the output signal will be reset.
Connect a signal to a pin of NR1506AS module and the status of this signal is reflected by the BI
output signal and the connected output symbol block in visualized page. Double click such output
symbol block and modify its description in a pop-up dialog box (or maintain default description;
input signal will not be affected).
Besides above method for the addition of BI signal and viewing the status, outputs of all configured
binary inputs (including elements) can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the window
(variable library). Please note the variable library has to be refreshed if there is any description
modification on output symbol block. The output symbol block of these binary inputs can be
configured as input symbol block of other elements by dragging.
9.4.2.2 Configuration of BO
Takes BO module in slot No.15 as an example.
Click “Program Config” node. Unfold module node “Slot15:BIO_12”, one page node:
“NR1521A_A” is shown.
Figure 9.4-5 Configuration graph of NR1521A
In the graph, NR1521A plug-in module symbol and respective input signals are shown with

Date: 2014-07-02
connection to input symbol block.
Plug-in module symbol shows functions corresponding to NR1521A input pins: numbers in the
“PIN” column are input terminal numbers of NR1521A module, and name or function of each pin is
described in the “BO_Name” column. Pins can be configured via their input signals to form input
symbol blocks.
Inputs of all configurable binary outputs can be viewed in the “Source” tab at the right side of the
window (variable library). As shown in the figure, each input corresponds to one way output
contact of the BO module. The output contact of BO module will operate (output relay pickup or
reset) in response to the status change of corresponding input signal. The output contacts of BO
modules can be configured or modified according to the application or drag the required signals
from the variable library.
9.5 Setting Configuration
After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in device and in
setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer software.
9.5.1 Active Setting Group Selection
Click “Settings” node to enter “Settings” interface. In the middle of editing window is the setting
group setup interface, where two parameters can be set: “Active Group” and “Setting Groups:
[1-30]” (shown in Figure 9.5-1), users can change the number in the two text boxes then click the
button “Set” to modify the two parameters. The text box of “Active Group” is used for users to
change the current active setting group. The text box of “Setting Groups: [1-30]” is used for users
to change the number of active setting groups, the number of sub-nodes of “Setting” node will
change with this parameter.
Several sub-nodes: “Global” and “Group x” (x: 1~n, n is the number that inputted in the text box of
“Setting Groups: [1-30]”, n should not be larger than 30). Among them, global settings (the
sub-node “Global”) are common for all setting groups. In setting groups Group 1~Group n, only
one group is the current active setting group used in device operation, and mainly includes
protection settings, the current active setting group can be switched among Group 1~Group n
when required.
Figure 9.5-1 Setup of setting group

Date: 2014-07-02
9.5.2 Browsing Settings
Click “Settings”→“Global” node, five sub-nodes are unfolded (number of sub-nodes may vary with
different device models) in the edit window. These sub-nodes are used to set system settings,
logic links, device settings, communication settings and label settings.
Click “Settings”→“Group x” node, all the protective settings of corresponding group can be shown
by clicking corresponding setting menu item.
9.5.3 Modify Name and Value of Settings
Although there are many setting group nodes, settings under these nodes have the same layout in
editing page. Therefore, steps of modification of settings are basically the same. It is seen from the
graph that when any setting node is clicked and open, the editing page will display name, value,
range, step, and unit of the settings in this sequence. Here, user can modify name and set value of
the settings according to actual application requirements.
Figure 9.5-2 Modify setting name command
The name of a setting is the name user will finally see on the device. Users can suitably modify
this name according to actual project requirements: right click on the name entry to be modified to
pop up a right-key context menu, execute command “Modify Name”; the following window will pop
up:

Date: 2014-07-02
Figure 9.5-3 Modify setting name dialog box
In the “Modify Name” dialog box, users will see two entries, “Original Name” is the default name of
this setting in the symbol library, and “Name” is the name currently used, and can be modified.
Modified setting value must not exceed its range (if there has an ordain). There are two types of
set value modification operation: direct input of the value after double clicking corresponding entry
of the setting value, or selection from a pull-down menu.
User can also right click the entry of set value and select “Get Default Value” in the right-key
context menu, so as to obtain default set value of this entry from the symbol library.
During modification and editing operations of settings in the customizing editing window, modified
item will become red, till users perform saving operation.
Figure 9.5-4 Modify a setting value

Date: 2014-07-02
10 Communications
10 Communications
Table of Contents
10 Communications ........................................................................... 10-a
10.1 General Description .................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.3 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.5 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.6 General Functions ........................................................................................................... 10-6
10.3.7 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet .................................................... 10-6

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6
10.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.5.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-8
10.5.4 Server Data Organization ...............................................................................................10-11
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15
10.5.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-23

10.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-23

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions...................................................................................................... 10-23
10.6.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-23
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions........................................................................................... 10-23
List of Figures
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-4
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-9
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ..................... 10-10
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-11

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
This section introduces NR’s remote communications interfaces. The protective device is
compatible with three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet). The
protocol provided by the protective device is indicated in the submenu in the “Comm Settings”
column. Using the keypad and LCD to set the parameter [Protocol_RS485A] and
[Protocol_RS485B], the corresponding protocol will be selected.
The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection no matter
whichever protocol is selected. It has advantage that 32 protective devices can be “daisy chained”
together in electrical connection using a twisted pair.
It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol
itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This
section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.
10.2 Rear Communication Port Information
10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay. Each port has a
ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data
communication and are intended for permanently wired connection to a remote control center.
10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus
The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, but
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.
10.2.1.2 Bus Termination
The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
EIA RS-485
Master 120 Ohm
120 Ohm
Slave Slave Slave
Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements
10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies
The EIA RS-485 requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e. the
communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus
topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.
Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length
must not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end,
normally at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially
when the cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.
This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to
the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.
10.2.1.4 Biasing
It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves
are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The
reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,
until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in
the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,
causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response
times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a
complete failure to communicate.
Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.
There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection
point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please
note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external
components will not be required.
NOTICE!
It is extremely IMPORTANT that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
so will result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to
the bus.
As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR CANNOT assume
responsibility for any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a
result of incorrect application of this voltage.
ENSURE that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic
inputs) as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.
10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu “Comm
Settings”.
10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable
It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.
Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable
10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies
Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star
structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also
connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been
connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
SCADA
Exchanger A
Exchanger B
Equipment Equipment Equipment
Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure
10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is
using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an
Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to
respond commands received from master station.
To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective
device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm
Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use
the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each
Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in
Chapter “Settings” for further details.
10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the
protective device is the slave device.
The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
 Initialization (reset)
 Time synchronization
 Event record extraction
 General interrogation
 General commands

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
 Disturbance records
10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.
The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.
10.3.2 Initialization
When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset
command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either
of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear
any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.
The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.
10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be
corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm
message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the
time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)
message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not
be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the
interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B
synchronized internal clock.
10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:
 Type identification (TYP)
 Function type (FUN)
 Information number (INF)
Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and
status of binary Input and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause of
transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.
The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the
submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and the information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined
in the IEC60870-5-103.
Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.
10.3.6 General Functions

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the relay,
and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more
details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.
Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103
Info” in the menu “Print”.
10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 32 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault
detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.
The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.
It can be printed by the submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”
10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet
The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. All the functions provided by this relay are based on generic functions of the
IEC60870-5-103. This relay will send all the relevant information on group caption to SAS or RTU
after establishing a successful communication link.
10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol
10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:
 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview
 IEC 61850-2: Glossary
 IEC 61850-3: General requirements
 IEC 61850-4: System and project management

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models
 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs
 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles
and models
 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)
 IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common
data classes
 IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible
logical node classes and data classes
 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link
 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3
 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing
These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.
10.5.2 Communication Profiles

PCS-915 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication protocol
stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires IP address to establish communications. These addresses are
located in the submenu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.
1. MMS protocol
IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.
2. Client/server
This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation device such as
protection relays, meters, RTUs, instrument transformers, tap changers, or bay controllers.
Please note that gateways can be considered as clients and servers subject to the communication

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
object. When retrieving data from IEDs within the substation, the gateways are considered as
servers whereas transmitting data to control centers, the gateways are considered as clients.
3. Peer-to-peer
This is a non-connection-oriented high speed communication between substation device, such as

protection relays. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer communication.
4. Substation configuration language (SCL)
A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED configurations and
communication systems according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has
an IED Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The
substation single line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The
entire substation configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The
SCD file is the combination of the following items: individual ICD files, SSD file, communication
system parameters (MMS, GOOSE control block, SV control block), as well as GOOSE/SV
connection relationship amongst IEDs.
10.5.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section
is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS
Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while
dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.
Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the
IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected
to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the
issued command of the clients.
Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.
NOTICE!
Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are
both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is
broken.
1) Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Client Client
Net A Net B Net A Net B
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true
Report Control Block Report Control Block

IED (Server) IED (Server)
Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance
Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.
IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically
disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when
both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to
“false”.
In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If
one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working
mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication
supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need
not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can
interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in
abnormal operation status.
In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the
client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.
2) Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 1
RptEna = true RptEna = true

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status
TCP Link
Main MMS Link
Standby MMS Link
Figure 10.5-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance
In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the
standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:
 Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.
 Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not
available.
If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will
set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or
“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”
through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted
MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different
manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is
positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.
NOTICE!
In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be
the same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is
198.120.0.0, network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is
198.120.1.2, and then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2,
i.e.: Net A IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258,
Net A IED host address equals to Net B IED host address.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
3) Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
Client Client
Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2 Report Instance 1 Report Instance 2
RptEna = true RptEna = true RptEna = false RptEna = true

TCP Link
MMS Link
Figure 10.5-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances
In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently
from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.
In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to
provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.
Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no
repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.
Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports
are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead
to report loss/redundancy.
As a conclusion:
In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;
In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are
applied on site.
For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex
mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network
deployment.
10.5.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.
Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common
information about the IED logical device.
10.5.4.1 Digital Status Values
The GGIO logical node is used to provide access to digital status points (including general I/O
inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags. The data content must be
configured before using. GGIO provides digital status points for access by clients. It is intended for
the use of GGIO by client to access to digital status values from PCS-915 series relays. Clients
can utilize the IEC61850 buffered report from GGIO to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and
HMI display screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering
capability reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are
transmitted to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control
block (BRCB) is defined in LLN0.
10.5.4.2 Analog Values
Most of measured analog values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the others in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Data of each MMXU logical node is
provided from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable
source. Data of MMXU1 is provided from CT/VT source 1 (usually for protection purpose), and
data of MMXU2 is provided from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All
these analog data objects are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and
the corresponding unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical
nodes provide the following data for each source:
 MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle
 MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.5.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes
The following list describes the protection elements for all PCS-915 series relays. The specified
relay will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.
 PDIF: current differential and transfer trip
 RBRF:Breaker failure
 PTOC: Time overcurrent
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function
The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PDIF1 is “PDIF1.ST.Op.general”. For PCS-915
series relay protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for the
corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is reported
via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.
10.5.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes
Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control
values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defined for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings, system settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked until Loc is changed to false. In PCS-915 series relays, besides the logical nodes
described above, there are some other logical nodes in the IEDs:
 LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.
 PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it is used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or more
protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or alternatively, any
combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to a new “operate” of
PTRC.
 RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to
the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System” (IEC
60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and is independent of the trigger
mode.
10.5.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.5.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting
IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),
binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and
MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via
an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.
 TrgOps: Trigger options.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Data-change
－ Bit 4: Integrity
－ Bit 5: General interrogation
 OptFlds: Option Fields.
The following bits are supported by PCS-915 series relays:
－ Bit 1: Sequence-number
－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
－ Bit 4: Data-set-name
－ Bit 5: Data-reference
－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
－ Bit 8: Conf-revision
－ Bit 9: Segmentation
 IntgPd: Integrity period.
 BufTm: Buffer time.
10.5.5.2 File Transfer
MMS file services allows transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from a PCS-915
series relay.
10.5.5.3 Timestamps
The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.
10.5.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes
IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:
 A five or six-character name prefix.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
 A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).
 A one or two-character instantiation index.
Complete names are in the form of xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is
configurable. Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and
7-2. It is recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation
project.
10.5.5.5 GOOSE Services
IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.
The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE logic link
settings in device.
The PCS-915 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)
communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-915 series relays.
IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.
10.5.6 ACSI Conformance

10.5.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement
Services Client Server PCS-915
Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N
Where:
C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared
O: Optional
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-915 relay
N: Currently not supported by PCS-915 relay
10.5.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement
M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y
Where:
C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared
C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared
C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared
C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared
M: Mandatory
Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays
N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays
10.5.6.3 ACSI Services Conformance Statement
Service Server/Publisher PCS-900 Series
Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y
S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y
S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.5.7 Logical Nodes

10.5.7.1 Logical Nodes Table
PCS-915 relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table. Note that the
actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.
Nodes PCS-915
L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential YES
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance －
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme －
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage －
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload －
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage －
PUPF: Underpower factor －
PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator －
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －
RREC: Autoreclosing －
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing －
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control －
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements YES

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －
MMXU: Measurement YES
MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Nodes PCS-915
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －
10.6 DNP3.0 Interface
10.6.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.
The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 3 of the protocol, plus some of
the features from level 4. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical)
at the rear side of this relay.
10.6.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.
10.6.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.
10.6.4 Application Layer Functions

10.6.4.1 Function Code
Function Code Function

0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
5 (0x05) Direct Operate
6 (0x06) Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
13 (0x0D) Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement
10.6.4.2 Supported Object List
The supported object groups and object variations are show in the following table.
Request: Master may issue/Outstation shall parse

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION REQUEST

Group/Variation
Description Function code Qualifier code
No.
1 (read) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
1 2 Binary Input: With flags 1 (read)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07, 08 (limited qty)
2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 1 (read)
2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 1 (read)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation 1 (read)
10 1 Binary output: Packed format 2 (write) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
3 (select)
Binary Command: Control relay output block 4 (operate) 17, 28 (index)
12 1
(CROB) 5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, no ack) 17, 28 (index)
1 (read) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
22 (assign class) 06 (no range, or all)
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 1 (read)
30 5 Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag 1 (read)
32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

Group/Variation
No.
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt 06 (no range, or all)
32 5 1 (read)
without time 07,08 (limited qty)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation 1 (read)
1 (read)
34 1 Analog Input Deadband: 16 ~ bit
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
1 (read)
34 3 Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt
2 (write)
17,28 (index)
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation 1 (read)
40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 1 (read)
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
40 3 1 (read)
flag 06 (no range, or all)
3 (select)
4 (operate) 17,28 (index)
41 1 Analog Output: 32 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. Op, no ack) 17,28 (index)
3 (select)
41 2 Analog Output: 16 ~ bit
5 (direct op)
3 (select)
41 3 Analog Output: Single ~ prec ft ~ pt
5 (direct op)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

Group/Variation
No.
1 (read) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded
50 3 2 (write) 07 (limited qty = 1)
time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 1
synchronized
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time,
51 2
unsynchronized
1 (read)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 2 Class Objects: Class 1 data 20 (enable unsol.)
21 (disable unsol.) 06 (no range, or all)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class Objects: Class 2 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
07,08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data 20 (enable unsol.)
22 (assign class)
Response: Master shall parse\Outstation may issue
Function code: decimalism
Qualifier code: hexadecimal
OBJECT GROUP & VARIATION RESPONSE

Group/Variation
No.
1 0 Binary Input: Any Variation
1 1 Binary Input: Packed format 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
1 2 Binary Input: With flags 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
2 0 Binary Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
2 1 Binary Input Event: Without time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

Group/Variation
No.
129 (response)
2 2 Binary Input Event: With absolute time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
2 3 Binary Input Event: With relative time 17, 28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 0 Binary output: Any Variation
10 1 Binary output: Packed format
Binary Command: Control relay output block 129 (response) echo of request
12 1
(CROB)
30 0 Analog Input: Any Variation
30 1 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 2 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 3 Analog Input: 32 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 4 Analog Input: 16 ~ bit without flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
30 5 Analog Input: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
32 0 Analog Input Event: Any Variation
129 (response)
32 1 Analog Input Event: 32 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
129 (response)
32 2 Analog Input Event: 16 ~ bit without time 17,28 (index)
130 (unsol. resp)
Analog Input Event: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt without 129 (response)
32 5 17,28 (index)
time 130 (unsol. resp)
34 0 Analog Input Deadband: Any Variation
129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)


34 3 Analog Input Deadband: Single ~ prec flt ~ pt
40 0 Analog Output Status: Any Variation

40 1 Analog Output Status: 32 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
40 2 Analog Output Status: 16 ~ bit with flag 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
Analog Output Status: single ~ prec flt ~ pt with
40 3 129 (response) 00, 01 (start ~ stop)
flag
Analog Output: 129 (response) echo of request
41 1
32 ~ bit
41 2
16 ~ bit
41 3
Single ~ prec ft ~ pt

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

Group/Variation
No.
129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1)
50 1 Time and Data: Absolute time
Time and Data: Absolute time at last recorded

50 3
time
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 1 07 (limited qty = 1)
synchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
Time and Data CTO: Absolute time, 129 (response)
51 2 07 (limited qty = 1)
unsynchronized 130 (unsol. resp)
60 1 Class Objects: Class 0 data
60 4 Class Objects : Class 3 data
10.6.4.3 Communication Table Configuration
This relay now supports 4 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table. This relay supports a default communication table and 4 user-defined communication tables,
and the default communication table is fixed by the manufacturer and not permitted to configure by
the user.
The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PCS-Explorer
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.
10.6.4.4 Analog Input and Output Configuration
To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.
The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications
10.6.4.5 Binary Output Configuration
The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group. The supported control functions are listed as below.
Information Point Pulse On/Null Pulse On/Close Pulse On/Trip Latch On/Null Latch Off/Null
Remote Control Not supported Close Trip Close Trip
Logic Link Not supported Set Clear Set Clear
Extended Output See following description
To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command

point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On ~ time” in the
related “Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On ~ time” is set as “0”, the
default pulse width is 500ms.
10.6.4.6 Unsolicited Messages
This relay does not transmit the unsolicited messages if the related logic setting is set as “0”. If the
unsolicited messages want to be transmitted, the related logic setting should be set as “1” or the
DNP3.0 master will transmit “Enable Unsolicited” command to this relay through “Function Code
20” (Enable Unsolicited Messages). If the “Binary Input” state changes or the difference value of
the “Analog Input” is greater than the “deadband” value, this device will transmit unsolicited
messages. If the DNP3.0 master needs not to receive the unsolicited messages, it should forbid
this relay to transmit the unsolicited messages by setting the related logic setting as “0” or through
the “Function Code 21” (Disable Unsolicited Messages).
10.6.4.7 Class Configuration
If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).

Date: 2015-03-07
10 Communications

Date: 2015-03-07
11 Installation
11 Installation
Table of Contents
11 Installation ...................................................................................... 11-a
11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-1
11.3 Check the Shipment ..................................................................................... 11-2
11.4 Material and Tools Required ........................................................................ 11-2
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-2
11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-3
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-5
11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines .......................................................................................................11-5
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................11-5
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ...................................................................................11-6
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation ..............................................................................11-6
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring.........................................................................................................11-7
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ...............................................................................................11-7
List of Figures
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment ........................................................................... 11-3
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment ........................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-4
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device ......................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-7
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-8

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
11.1 Overview
The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.
Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.
Air must circulate freely around the device. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the device and terminated correctly and
pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in this
section.
11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe
the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the device.
In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering
configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules
and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.
WARNING!
ONLY insert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To this
end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.
NOTICE!
Industry packs and ribbon cables may ONLY be replaced on a workbench for electronic
equipment. Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in
the unit's housing.
NOTICE!
Jumper links may ONLY be changed on a workbench for electronic equipment.

Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when not in the unit's
housing.
NOTICE!
A module can ONLY be inserted in the slot designated in the chapter 6. Components
can be damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.
The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:
 Should boards have to be removed from this device installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.
 Only works on the board which has been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed
for electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,
however, while inserting or withdrawing units.
 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.
11.3 Check the Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR
Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be
found.
Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or
agent.
If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing
in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the
permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.
11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this device is mounted in cubicles).
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

NOTICE!
Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of this device.
The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of
electronic boards.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient
conditions, such as:
1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).
2. Surge voltages of high amplitude and short rise time, extreme changes of temperature, high
levels of humidity, severe vibration and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided as
far as possible.

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically
(visibility of markings).
11.6 Mechanical Installation

NOTICE!
It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle for
heat emission of this device.
The relay is made of one 8U height or one 8U height add one 4U height 19" chassis with 8
connectors on its rear panel.
Following figure shows the dimensions of 4U relay for reference in mounting.
482.6 (290)
465
Front Side
101.6
177
465±0.2
+0.4
451 -0
4-Ø6.8
Cut-Out
101.6±0.1
+0.4
179 -0
Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of 4U equipment
Following figure shows the dimensions of 8U relay for reference in mounting.

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
482.6 (290)
465
101.6
Front Side
354.8
76.2
101.6
465±0.2
+0.4
451-0
8-Ø6.8
76.2±0.1 101.6±0.1
Cut-Out
+0.4
356.8 -0
101.6±0.1
Figure 11.6-2 Dimensions of 8U equipment
Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.
Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines
NOTICE!
All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.
Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of
other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.
11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.
Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.
NOTICE!
If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.
Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).
The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.
NOTICE!
For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials
according to the electrochemical code.
The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a
grounding strip (braided copper).

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
Door or hinged
equipment frame
Cubicle ground
rail close to floor
Braided
copper strip
Station
ground
Conducting
connection
Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system
11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be
connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing
is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.
There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this device, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this device. Therefore, the ground terminal on the
rear panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.
Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this device
11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.
The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.
Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting
them firmly to the items to be connected.

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.
The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.
Press/pinch fit
cable terminal
Braided
copper strip Terminal bolt
Contact surface
Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination
11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring
There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this device: braided copper
cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:
 Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm 2 ~ 6.0mm 2
 Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2
 AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm 2 ~ 2.5mm 2
 AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm 2 ~ 4.0mm 2
 Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable
 Ethernet communication: 4-pair shielded twisted category 5E cable
11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables
DANGER!
NEVER allow a open current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
device while the primary system is live. Open CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage that cause death.
A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into
a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for
further details about the pin defines of these connectors.
The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

Date: 2013-12-13
11 Installation
01 02
03 04
Tighten 05 06
07 08
09 10
11 12
01
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

Date: 2013-12-13
12 Commissioning
12 Commissioning
Table of Contents
12 Commissioning ............................................................................. 12-a
12.1 General ......................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2
12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2
12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized........................................................................................... 12-3
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks............................................................................................. 12-7
12.5.4 Print Fault Report........................................................................................................... 12-34
12.5.5 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................. 12-34
12.5.6 Final Checks .................................................................................................................. 12-34
List of Figures
Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration ............................................................................... 12-8
Figure 12.5-2 External fault test ............................................................................................. 12-12
Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1) ................................................................................... 12-13
Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test .................................. 12-14
Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test ...................................................................... 12-15
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed).................................. 12-17
Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open) .................................... 12-18
Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test ................................................................................. 12-21
Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test ..................................................................................... 12-22
Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test ......................................................... 12-24
Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test ..................................................................................................... 12-26
Figure 12.5-12 BFP test ........................................................................................................... 12-30

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.1 General
This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection
functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of
a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as
extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.
To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning
correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for
completion as required.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the
safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.
12.2 Safety Instructions
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits MUST be short-circuited BEFORE the current

leads to the device are disconnected.
WARNING!
ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
 The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor
before any other electrical connection is made.
 Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply
voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
 Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply
voltage (storage capacitors!)
 The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
 When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are
disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.
12.3 Commission Tools
Minimum equipment required:
 Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.
 Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V
respectively.
 Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).
 Phase angle meter.
 Phase rotation meter.
NOTICE!
Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.
Optional equipment:
 An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance test when required).
 A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).
 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).
 PCS-915 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-9000.
12.4 Setting Familiarization
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu
structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.
With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED
indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault
and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be
entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on
disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user
manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
familiar with its operation.
12.5 Product Checks
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.
12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can
be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function
tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.
The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.
 Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
 User interfaces test
 Binary input circuits and output circuits test
 AC input circuits test
 Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of
the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
 Measuring elements test
 Timers test
 Metering and recording test
 Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
 On load test.
 Phase sequence check and polarity check.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is
necessary.
 Protection panel
Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.
The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.
 Panel wiring
Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section
meeting the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.
 Label
Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.
 Equipment plug-in modules
Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.
 Earthing cable
Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.
 Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button
Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.
12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)
Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be
done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:
 Voltage transformer circuits
 Current transformer circuits
 DC power supply

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
 Optic-isolated control inputs
 Output contacts
 Communication ports
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each
circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.1.3 External Wiring
Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.
Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.
Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the
customer’s normal practice.
12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply
The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal
power supply rating.
The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,
before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.
Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See
this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.
WARNING!
Energize this device ONLY if the power supply is within the specified operating range in
the Chapter “Technical Data”.
12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly
and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these
checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the
associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display
Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and
forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
12.5.2.2 Date and Time
If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will
be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct
and not need to set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.
12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy.
The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip when the relay was last
energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate when the
auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before
proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing
required for that LED because it is known to be operational.
12.5.2.4 Testing the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs
Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We
need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious errors in it.
Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “MISC ALM” LED will
light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “MISC ALM” LED extinguishes.
12.5.2.5 Testing the TRIP LED
The “xx TRIP” LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay. However
the “xx TRIP” LED will operate during the setting checks. Therefore no further testing of the “TRIP”
LED is required at this stage.
12.5.2.6 Testing the AC Current Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.7 Testing the AC Voltage Inputs
This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
NOTICE!
The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
12.5.2.8 Testing the Binary Inputs
This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.
The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for
terminal numbers.
Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.
The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized
input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.
Test method:
To unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and do the insulation resistance test
for each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection.
12.5.3 Protection Function Checks

12.5.3.1 Hardware Configuration
The following is an configuration just for testing requirement, the protection function test in this
section is conducted based on this configuration. For a specific project, the actual configuration is
provided by a project configuration manual or configured by users, the concrete pin definition
maybe different.
Assumption: All the binary input modules are NR1506AS module. For different type of binary input
module, the pin definitions are different.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1601 Ia
1603 Ib BC1.62PD.BI_PD 0502 Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker
Bus Coupler
AC Current of BC1 1605 Ic BC1.BI_52b 0409
1602 BC1.BI_52a
Ian 0410
1604 Ibn BC1.BI_BFI 0602

Normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker
1606 Icn BC1.BI_ChkBFI 0603 Breaker failure initiating binary input
Normally open auxiliary contact of circuit breaker
Fdr01.BI_BFI 0604
Fdr01.BI_52b 0411
1607 Ia
Feeder 01
Fdr01.BI_52a 0412
1609 Ib
50BF.BI_RlsVCE 0605 Binary input of releasing VCE of BFP
1611 Ic
Fdr01.BI_Cls 0516 Manually closing binary input
AC Current of feeder 01 1608 Ian
Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD 0503 Pole disagreement binary input of circuit breaker
1610 Ibn
Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1 0702
1612 Icn
Fdr01.BI_89a_BB2 0703
Normally open auxiliary contact of BB1 disconnector

1613 Ia Normally open auxiliary contact of BB2 disconnector
1615 Ib
Feeder 02
AC Current of feeder 02 1617 Ic Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1 0704
1614 Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2 0705

Ian
1616 Ibn
1618 Icn
2807 Ua 50BF.BI_En 0402 BFP enabling binary input
87B.BI_En 0403 BBP enabling binary input

Busbar No.1
2809 Ub
BI_En_IntLink1 0404 Inter-connected operation mode binary input
AC Voltage of BB1 2811 Uc
50SOTF.BI_En 0405 BC/BS SOTF protection enabling binary input
2808 Uan
50/51.BI_En 0406 Overcurrent protection enabling binary input
2810 Ubn Pole disagreement overcurrent protection
62PD.BI_En 0407 enabling binary input
2812 Ucn Fdr.50DZ.BI_En 0408 Feeder dead zone fault protection enabling
binary input
2813 Ua 1101
BO_Trp1_BC1 Tripping contact of BC1 (first)
Busbar No.2
2815 Ub 1102
AC Voltage of BB2 2817 Uc 1105

BO_Trp1_Fdr01 Tripping contact of feeder 01 (first)
2814 Uan 1106
2816 Ubn 1109

BO_Trp1_Fdr02
Tripping contact of feeder 02 (first)
2818 Ucn 1110
Figure 12.5-1 Testing used configuration
In order to convenient to test, the power supply of opto-coupler should be connected as follows.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
0401 Opto+
0501 Opto+
+ 0601 Opto+
PCS-915
DC 0701 Opto+
- 0422 Opto-
0522 Opto-
0622 Opto-
0722 Opto-
12.5.3.2 Function Configurations and Related Settings
MOT Configuration
Application F
A: Single BB, 1½ Breakers
B: Single BB with one BS (single CT)
C: Single BB with one BS (dual CTs)
D: Single BB with two BS (single CT)
E: Single BB with two BS (dual CTs) BB: busbar;
F: Double BB with one BC (single CT) BC: bus coupler;
G: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) BS: bus section.
H: Double BB with one BC (single CT) and two BS (single CT)
I: Double BB with one BC (dual CTs) and two BS (single CT)
J: Double BB with two BC (single CT) and one BS (single CT)
K: Double BB with two BC (dual CTs) and one BS (dual CTs)
The option is reserved for other busbar
L: Other arrangement, further modifications for
the program are required
Software Version B
A: Standard 1 Please refer to Table 3.3-2 for concrete
B: Standard 2 contents
Language C
C: English + Chinese
F: English + French
R: English + Russian
S: English + Spanish
Protocol B
A: IEC 61850-8-1 (MMS & GOOSE)
B: IEC 60870-5-103 (Ethernet, Serial port)
C: DNP 3.0 (Ethernet)
Number of Terminals A
A: 1~16 (use 8U device)
B: 17~25 (use 8U+4U device) A 4U extended chassis is added
Dual-position Binary Inputs (BI) C

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
X: Not required
A: Dual-position BI for disconnector
B: Dual-position BI for circuit breaker
C: Dual-position BI for disconnector and circuit breaker
Voltage Concerned Functions A
A: With voltage concerned functions
B: Without voltage concerned functions
Communication Ports&Time Synchronization Mode C
A: 3 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x RS-485 + RS-485 The MON plug in module is NR1101F
(IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
B: 4 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + The MON plug in module is NR1102M
RS-232 (Printer) module
C: 2 x 10Base-T/100Base-TX (RJ45) + 2 x 100Base-FX The MON plug in module is NR1102N
(ST-Connector) + RS-485 (IRIG-B or PPS) + RS-232 (Printer) module
AC Input
A: CT 1A
B: CT 5A
Power Supply for Device
A: 110~250Vdc
Basic information configuration
All protective function Disable
Phase-segregated breaker position Disable
Phase-segregated binary input for initiating BFP Enable
Enforced disconnector position Disable
Enabling binary input and function link of a protective element is
Disable
configured according to each bay
Logic setting of a protective element is configured according to each
Enable
bay
Protective function configuration
Breaker failure protection re-tripping function Enable
Binary input of releasing voltage controlled element for breaker
Enable
failure protection
IDMT overcurrent characteristic Disable
Label settings
Name_Bus1 BB1
Name_Bus2 BB2
Name_Bay1 BC1
Name_Bay2 Fdr01
Name_Bay3 Fdr02
System settings
U2n_PP 110V
Bay1.I1n 1200A
Bay2.I1n 1200A

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Bay3.I1n 1200A
I2n_Ref 1A
12.5.3.3 Busbar Differential Protection
All relevant settings can be configured temporarily as following for easier test. (Just for reference)
BBP Settings
87B.I_Pkp 1.8A
87B.VCE.U_Set 30V
87B.VCE.3U0_Set 8V
87B.VCE.U2_Set 3V
87B.En 1
87B.VCE.En 1
Function Links
87B.Link 1
Link_IntLink1 0
Change the following settings to avoid effects on steady state differential protection element.
[I_AlmH_CTS]=5A
[I_AlmL_CTS]=5A
All relevant binary inputs can be connected as follows.
0402 [87B.BI_En]
0404 [BI_En_IntLink1]
0401 Opto+
PCS-915
Test source
0702 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0704 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1]
0705 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701 Opto+
Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]
Please pay attention that the polarity mark of CT of bus coupler is the same to that of feeder
connected to bus 1, but opposite to that connected to bus 2.
 Simulate an external fault
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the reverse polarity in series and then connect CT of

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series (Refer to Figure 12.5-2). Inject a current (For example
ITEST1  100 ) to make steady-state percentage restraint differential element operate.
3. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element does not
operate.
ITEST1
A 1601
Test source 1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
1609
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Feeder 01
1611
PCS-915
1608
1610
1612
1613
1615
1617
Feeder 02
1614
1616
1618
Figure 12.5-2 External fault test
Because check zone differential current is equal to zero, the protection judges that as an external
fault.
 Simulate an internal fault (BB1)
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 though energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and set
feeder 02 connecting to BB2 though energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
2. Connect CT of feeder 01, BC CT, and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer
to Figure 12.5-3).
Inject a current I TEST1  1.00 A to make steady-state percentage restraint differential

0
3.
element operate.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
4. VCE for BBP will operate. Steady-state percentage restraint differential element operates with
“BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on simultaneously.
ITEST1
A 1601
Test source 1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
1609
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Feeder 01
1611
PCS-915
1608
1610
1612
1613
1615
Feeder 02
1617
1614
1616
1618
Figure 12.5-3 Internal fault test (BB1)
 Inter-connected operation mode
1. Energize the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1]
2. Set the virtual binary input [Link_IntLink1]=1
3. Repeat the internal fault test mentioned above. Steady-state percentage restraint differential
element will operate to trip feeder 01 and feeder 02, “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED
will turn on simultaneously. After the test is finished, set the virtual binary input
[Link_IntLink1]=0 and de-energized the binary input [BI_En_IntLink1].
 Check the setting [87B.I_Pkp]=1.8A
1. Set both feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and CT of feeder 02 with the same polarity in series (Refer to Figure
12.5-4)

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
3. Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  0.95/2  0.85500 A), the steady state percentage
restraint differential element will not operate.
4. Inject a current (For example ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp] 1.05/2  0.94500 A), the steady-state
percentage restraint differential element will operate to trip BB1
5. Inject a current ( ITEST1  [87B.I_Pkp]  2/2  1.800 A), the steady-state percentage restraint
differential element will operate to trip BB1. By the timer, users can get the time of BBP
operating to trip BB1.
ITEST1
A 1607
Test Source 1609
1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
1612
CURRENT CIRCUIT
PCS-915
1613
1615
Feeder 02
1617
1614
1616
1618
Start
Timer
PCS-915
1105 BO_Trp1_Fdr01
Stop
1106
Figure 12.5-4 Steady-state percentage restraint characteristic test
 Voltage control element

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
A 1607
1609
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
Test Source 1612
PCS-915
UTEST1 V
2807
UTEST2 V
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
2809
Busbar No.1
UTEST3 V
2811
2808
2810
2812
Figure 12.5-5 Voltage controlled element test
 Check Phase Voltage
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 by energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage

(U1=U2=U3=31.5V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
3. Keep injected current (2A) and change injected value of three-phase positive-sequence
voltage (U1=U2=U3=28.5V). Steady-state percentage differential element will operate.
 Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence voltage (U1=63.5V,

U2=63.5V, U3=55.9V) to VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not
operate.
voltage (U1=63.5V, U2=63.5V, U3=55.1V). Steady-state percentage differential element will
operate.
4. Change the setting [87B.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
 Check Negative-sequence Voltage

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V
2. Inject a current (2A) to CT of feeder 01 and three-phase positive-sequence rated voltage to

VT of BB1. Steady-state percentage differential element will not operate.
not operate.
operate.
5. Change the setting [87B.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
12.5.3.4 BC/BS Dead Zone Fault Protection
50DZ Settings
BC.50DZ.I_Set 0.1A
BC.50DZ.t_Op 0.15s
0409 [BC1.BI_52b]
0401 Opto+ PCS-915
Test source 0702 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0705 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701 Opto+
 BC breaker is closed
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing the binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and
set feeder 02 connecting to BB2 through energizing binary input [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2].
2. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT the opposite polarity in series, and then connect CT of
feeder 02 with reverse polarity in series. Then connect binary output contact of tripping BB2
and three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b] to test
source. Connect binary output contact of tripping BB1 and binary output contact of tripping
feeder 02 to time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-6).

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
I TEST1
A 1601
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1609
Feeder 01
1611
PCS-915
Test source 1608
1610
1612
1613
1615
Feeder 02
1617
1614
1616
1618
1109 BO_Trp1_Fdr02
PCS-915
1110
1105 BO_Trp1_Fdr01
Start 1106
Timer
Stop
Figure 12.5-6 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is closed)
3. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to simulate to trip BC
breaker and to make dead zone fault protection operate. (For example STAGE 1:
I TEST1  20 0 A and de-energize three phases normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC
breaker; STAGE 2: I TEST1  20 A and energize three phases normally closed auxiliary
0
contacts of BC breaker)
4. Use binary output contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) as a triggering signal to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2.
5. Start test from STAGE 1. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB2. The binary output
contact of tripping BB2 (feeder 02 will be tripped) will close and control the test source to
change the state from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, and then BBP will trip BB1 with a time delay for
dead zone fault protection operates to make BC current be excluded from discriminating zone
differential current. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on.
 BC breaker is open

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1. Set feeder 01 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary input [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1].
2. Energize normally closed auxiliary contacts of BC breaker [BC1.BI_52b].
3. Connect CT of feeder 01 and BC CT with the opposite polarity in series, and connect VTs of
BB1 and BB2. (Refer to Figure 12.5-7)
ITEST1
A 1601
1603
Bus coupler
1605
1602
1604
1606
1607
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

Test source
1609
Feeder 01
1611
PCS-915
1608
1610
1612
V
UTEST1
2807
BB1 Voltage
2809
2811
2808
2813
BB2 Voltage
2815
2817
2814
Figure 12.5-7 BC dead zone protection test (BC breaker is open)
4. Please set two stages of test source and change from stage 1 to stage 2 to make dead zone
protection operate. (For example STAGE 1: ITEST1  000 A , UTEST1  4000 V ; STAGE 2:
ITEST1  200 A , UTEST1  000 V ).
5. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BBP should operate to trip BC breaker and BB1 with
“BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
12.5.3.5 Feeder Dead Zone Fault Protection

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
50DZ Settings
Fdr.50DZ.I_Set 0.1A
Fdr.50DZ.t_Op 0.02s
Bay2.50DZ.En 1
Function Links
50DZ.Link 1
0408 [50DZ.BI_En]
0411 [Fdr01.BI_52b]
0401 Opto+
PCS-915
0516 [Fdr01.BI_Cls]
Test source
0501 Opto+
0702 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0701 Opto+
Energize the binary input [50DZ.BI_En]
 Feeder DZP
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. Inject a current (0.2 IN) to three phases of this feeder.
ITEST1
A 1607
ITEST2
CURRENT CIRCUIT
PCS-915
Test Source A 1609

ITEST3
A 1611
Feeder 01
1608
1610
1612
4. DZP will operate and send transfer trip signal to the remote end with a time delay of 20ms.
 Manual Closing Contact

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
2. Energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker of feeder 01

[Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. Energize closing binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] for 50ms and inject a current (0.2IN) to any phase
of this feeder for 500ms. DZP will not operate.
4. If the binary input [Fdr01.BI_Cls] is energized for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm
[Fdr01.Alm_Cls] will be issued and feeder DZP will still be blocked.
 Disable Feeder DZP
2. At the beginning, inject three-phase current to any feeder, which is slightly greater than 0.04 IN
(for example, 0.05 IN) and energize three-phase normally closed auxiliary contacts of breaker
of feeder 01 [Fdr01.BI_52b].
3. After an alarm [Fdr01.Alm_52b] is issued. When feeder current increases to over 0.2 IN,
feeder DZP will not operate.
12.5.3.6 BC/BS SOTF Protection
SOTF Settings
50SOTF.I_Set 1A
Bay1.50SOTF.En 1
Function Links
50SOTF.Link 1
0405 [50SOTF.BI_En]
PCS-915
Test source 0409 [BC1.BI_52b]
0401 Opto+
Check BC SOTF protection
1. Energize the binary input [50SOTF.BI_En].
2. Connect the BC CT, and connect binary input [BC1.BI_52b]. (Refer to Figure 12.5-8)

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
A 1601
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Test source 1603
BUS COUPLER
PCS-915
1605
1602
1604
1606
Start
Timer
PCS-915
1101 BO_Trp1_BC1
Stop
1102
Figure 12.5-8 BC SOTF protection test
3. Injecting a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A , BC SOTF protection should not operate.
If injecting a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
If injecting a current I TEST1  20 A , BC SOTF protection should operate to trip BC

0
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of SOTF
protection operating to trip BC.
BC SOTF protection is only enabled for 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, users
must inject the current within 300ms if any of the following conditions satisfied, or BC SOTF
protection should not operate.
 The position status of BC/BS breaker changes from open to closed.
 BC current changes from being smaller than 0.04IN to being larger than 0.04IN.
 Both connected busbars are in service (when busbar phase voltage is greater than 0.3U N or
current of any connected bay is larger than 0.04IN, the busbar is thought as be in service).
12.5.3.7 Overcurrent Protection
Takes definite-time overcurrent protection of BC as an example.
OC Settings
Bay1.50/51P.I_Set 1A
Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set 1A
Bay1.50/51P.t_Op 0.5s
Bay1.50/51G.t_Op 0.5s
Bay1.50/51P.Opt_Curve 0

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Bay1.50/51G.Opt_Curve 0
Bay1.50/51P.En 1
Bay1.50/51G.En
Function Link
50/51.Link 1
PCS-915
0406 [50/51.BI_En]
Test source
0401 Opto+
Energize binary input [50/51.BI_En].
Connect the BC CT and binary output contact of tripping BC to time meter. (For example Figure
12.5-9)
ITEST1
A 1601
Test source
1603
CURRENT CIRCUIT
1605
Bus coupler
PCS-915
1602
1604
1606
Start
Timer
1101 BO_Trp1_BC1
PCS-915
Stop
1102
Figure 12.5-9 BC OC protection test
 Check the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection will not operate.
2. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC phase overcurrent protection operates to trip BC
0
3.
breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of phase

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set] =1A
 Check the setting [Bay1.50/51G.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set]=4A
1. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should not
operate.
2. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection should
operate to trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on.
Inject a current I TEST1  20 A and BC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates to

0
3.
trip BC breaker with “MISC TRIP” LED turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of
zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating to trip BC.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting i.e. [Bay1.50/51P.I_Set] =1A
12.5.3.8 Pole Disagreement Protection
Takes pole disagreement protection of BC as an example.
PD Settings
Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set 1A
Bay1.62PD.I2_Set 0.6A
Bay1.62PD.t_Op 1s
Bay1.62PD.En 1
Function Links
62PD.Link 1
0407 [62PD.BI_En]
PCS-915
Test source 0401 Opto+
0502 [BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
0501 Opto+
Energize the binary inputs [62PD.BI_En] and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
 Check settings [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=5A

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
1. Connect BC CT to test source. Connect binary output contact of BC protection operating to a

time meter (Refer to Figure 12.5-10).
ITEST1
A 1601
Test source
1603
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Bus coupler
1605
PCS-915
1602
1604
1606
Start
Timer
1101
PCS-915
Stop BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
Figure 12.5-10 BC pole disagreement protection test
2. Inject a current ITEST1  0.950 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC does not operate.
3. Inject a current ITEST1  1.050 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED

should be turned on.
4. Inject a current I TEST1  20 0 A with persisting time longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. PD protection of BC operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP” LED
should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A.
 Check the setting i.e. [Bay1.62PD.I2_Set]=1A
Change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=5A
1. Connect BC CT.
Inject a current I TEST1  0.6 * 3 * 0.95  1.710 A with persisting time longer than the
0
2.
time delay [Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection does not operate.
Inject a current I TEST1  1.89 0 A and persisting time is longer than the time delay
0
3.
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP”

LED should be turned on.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
I TEST1  3.60 0 A
4. Inject a current and persisting time is longer than the time delay
[Bay1.62PD.t_Op]. BC PD protection should operate to trip BC breaker, and “MISC TRIP”
LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of PD protection operating to
trip BC.
5. After finishing the test, please change the setting [Bay1.62PD.3I0_Set]=0.6A.
6. After finishing all test of BC PD protection, de-energize the two binary inputs [62PD.BI_En]
and [BC1.62PD.BI_PD].
12.5.3.9 BC/BS Breaker Failure Protection
BC BFP Settings
BC.50BF.I_Set 1A
BC.50BF.t_TrpBB 0.5s
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
0403 [87B.BI_En]
0406 [50/51.BI_En]
0407 [62PD.BI_En] PCS-915

0401 Opto+
0502 [BC1.62PD.BI_PD]
0602 [BC1.BI_BFI]
0603 [BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
0601 Opto+
0702 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0705 [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB2]
0701 Opto+
The connection is shown as follows.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
ITEST1
A 1601
Test source
1603
CURRENT CIRCUIT
Bus coupler
1605
PCS-915
1602
1604
1606
Start
Timer
1109
PCS-915
Stop BO_Trp1_Fdr02
1110
Figure 12.5-11 BC BFP test
 Check external binary input initiating BC BFP
1. Connect BC CT to test source
2. STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1  0.950 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP will not operate.
energized; STAGE 2: I TEST1  1.05 0 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and
[BC1.BI_ChkBFI] are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, BC BFP operates to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED
and “MISC TRIP” LED should be turned on.
energized; STAGE 2: ITEST1  20 0 A and binary inputs [BC1.BI_BFI] and [BC1.BI_ChkBFI]
are energized; Persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE
1 to STAGE 2. BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2. “BFP TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP”
LED should be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of BC BFP operating to trip
BB2.
 Check BBP initiating BC BFP
Change the setting [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1
Energize the function binary input [87B.BI_En]

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
2. Simulating an internal fault on BB1 (please refer to Section 12.5.3.3).
3. Inject a current ITEST1  20 0 A and the persisting time is longer than the setting
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC
TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate
to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
 Check OC protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.50/51P.En]=1, [50/51.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.7).
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. OC protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP
TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.50/51.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[50/51.BI_En].
 Check PD protection initiating BC BFP
Change the two settings [Bay1.62PD.En]=1, [62PD.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
2. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of BC operates (please refer to Section

12.5.3.8).

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
[BC.50BF.t_TrpBB].
4. PD protection of BC will operate to trip BC breaker. “MISC TRIP” LED will be turned on first.
Then after a delay [BC.50BF.t_TrpBB], BC BFP will operate to trip BB1 and BB2, and “BFP
TRIP” LED will be turned on.
5. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay1.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
12.5.3.10 Feeder Breaker Failure Protection
Fdr BFP Settings
50BF.t_ReTrp 0.15s
50BF.t_TrpBC 0.25s
50BF.t_TrpBB 0.35s
50BF.VCE.U_Set 30V
50BF.VCE.3U0_Set 8V
50BF.VCE.U2_Set 3V
Bay2.50BF.I_Set 1.5A
Bay2.50BF.3I0_Set 1A
Bay2.50BF.I2_Set 1A
Bay2.50BF.En_3I0 0
Bay2.50BF.En_I2 0
50BF.En_Current_Ctrl 0
Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE 0
50BF.En 1
50BF.VCE.En 1
50BF.En_ReTrp 1
OC Settings
50/51.En_Init50BF 1
PD Settings
62PD.En_Init50BF 1
Function Links
50BF.Link 1

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
0402 [50BF.BI_En]
0403 [87B.BI_En]
0406 [50/51.BI_En]
0407 [62PD.BI_En]
PCS-915
0401 Opto+
0503 [Fdr01.62PD.BI_PD]
0604 [Fdr01.BI_BFI]
0605 [50BF.BI_RlsVCE]
0601 Opto+
0702 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0704 [Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1]
0701 Opto+
Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_En]
Set feeder 01 and feeder 02 connecting to BB1 through energizing binary inputs
[Fdr01.BI_89a_BB1] and [Fdr02.BI_89a_BB1].
Connect the VT of BB1 and CT of feeder 01 to test source (Refer to Figure 12.5-12).

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
V V V
UTEST1 2807
UTEST2 2809
Busbar No.1
CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

UTEST3 2811
2808
2810
2812
PCS-915
ITEST1
A 1607
1609
Feeder 01
Test source
1611
1608
1610
1612
Timer Start
t2 1101
Stop BO_Trp1_BC1
1102
Start
PCS-915
t1 1105
Stop BO_Trp1_Fdr01
1106
Start
t3 1109 BO_Trp1_Fdr02
Stop
1110
Figure 12.5-12 BFP test
 Check external binary input initiating BFP
STAGE 1: ITEST1  00 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized; STAGE 2:

0
1.
I TEST1  1.425 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP will
not operate.

0
2.
I TEST1  1.575 0 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of
STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP
operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP
TRIP” LED and “MISC TRIP” will be turned on.

0
3.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
I TEST1  30 0 A
and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized. Persisting time of STAGE 1
and STAGE 2 are set as 1s. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2, feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED and
“MISC TRIP” will be turned on. By the timer, users can get the time of feeder BFP operating to
re-trip feeder 01 (t1), trip BC breaker (t2) and trip BB1 (t2).
 Check BBP initiating BFP
Change the two settings [87B.En]=1, [87B.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [87B.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault on BB1.
Inject a current I TEST1  30 A and the persisting time is set as 1s.
0
2.
3. BBP protection should operate to trip BB1 and BC breaker. “BBP TRIP” LED and “MISC
TRIP” LED will be turned on first. Then feeder BFP operates to re-trip feeder 01, trip BC
breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [87B.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[87B.BI_En].
 Check OC protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.50/51P.En]=1 and [50/51.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [50/51.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make OC protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.7).
0
2.
3. OC protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.50/51P.En]=0 and de-energize the binary
input [50/51.BI_En].
 Check PD protection initiating BFP
Change the two settings [Bay2.62PD.En]=1 and [62PD.Link]=1
Energize the binary input [62PD.BI_En]
1. Simulating an internal fault to make PD protection of feeder 01 operates (please refer to

Section 12.5.3.8).

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
0
2.
3. PD protection of feeder 01 will operate to trip feeder 01 breaker. Then feeder BFP operates to
re-trip feeder 01, trip BC breaker and trip BB1 with different time delays. “BFP TRIP” LED will
be turned on.
4. After finishing the test, change the setting [Bay2.62PD.En]=0 and de-energize the binary input
[62PD.BI_En].
 Check VCE of BFP
 Check Phase Voltage
1. Set three stages: STAGE1: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V
UTEST3  63.5120 0 V , ITEST1  00 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is de-energized;
STAGE2: U TEST1  31.50 V , U TEST2  31.5  120 V , U TEST3  31.5 120 V ,

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized;
STAGE3: U TEST1  28.50 V , U TEST2  28.5   120 V , U TEST3  28.5 120 V ,

0 0 0
ITEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.
2. The persisting time of STAGE 1, STAGE 2 and STAGE 3 are set as 1s.
3. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP will not operate. Sequentially test from STAGE 2 to
STAGE 3. BFP operates.
 Check Residual Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 10V

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized; STAGE3:
U TEST1  63.50 0 V , U TEST2  63.5   120 0 V , U TEST3  55.1120 0 V ,

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
5. Change the setting [50BF.VCE.U2_Set] as 3V.
 Check Negative-sequence Voltage
Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 20V.

0 0 0
I TEST1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized; STAGE3:
U TEST1  63.50 0 V , U TEST2  63.5   120 0 V , U TEST3  54.05 120 0 V ,
5. Change the setting [50BF.VCE.3U0_Set] as 8V.
 Check external binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] releasing the VCE of BFP
Change the logic setting [Bay2.50BF.En_BI_RlsVCE] as “1”.
1. De-energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE].
2. Set two stages: STAGE1: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V
STAGE2: UTEST1  63.50 0 V , UTEST2  63.5  120 0 V , UTEST3  63.5120 0 V ,
ITESY1  2.50 0 A and binary input [Fdr01.BI_BFI] is energized.
3. The persisting time of STAGE 1 and STAGE 2 are set as 1s.
4. Start test from STAGE 1 to STAGE 2. BFP should not operate.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
5. Energize the binary input [50BF.BI_RlsVCE] and repeat the above test, BFP will operate.
12.5.4 Print Fault Report
In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.
1) Trip event report
2) Binary input when protection devices start
3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start
4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE
5) The setting value when the protection device trips
12.5.5 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:
 Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.
 Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).
 Check the polarity of each current transformer.
However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant being protected.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.
12.5.6 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been
necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.
If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Date: 2014-07-02
12 Commissioning

Date: 2014-07-02
13 Maintenance
13 Maintenance
Table of Contents
13 Maintenance .................................................................................. 13-a
13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair ......................................................................... 13-1
13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-2
13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-3
13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-3

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
This device is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and signal
processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays
are hermetically sealed.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective
rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are
not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.
13.1 Appearance Check

1. The device case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly
fixed in the case. Device terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel
with very good feeling can be operated flexibly.
2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw device board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the
primary system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the
device board when it is unnecessary.
3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.
13.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv State” screen on the LCD.
When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:
1. Test circuit connections are correct
2. Modules are securely inserted in position
3. Correct DC power voltage is applied
4. Correct AC inputs are applied
5. Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
13.3 Replace Failed Modules
WARNING!
Module can ONLY be replaced while the device power supply is switched off.
ONLY appropriately trained and qualified personnel can perform the replacement by
strictly observing the precautions against electrostatic discharge.
WARNING!
Five seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be
present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
CAUTION!
Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wristband and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, electronic
components could be damaged.
CAUTION!
Check the device configuration after a replacement of module. Unintended operation of

device may occur.
If the failure is identified to be in the device module and the user has spare modules, the user can
recover the device by replacing the failed modules.
Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.
Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, MON, BI, BO, etc.)
and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the MON module replaced should
have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have the
same ratings.
The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “Information”->“Version Info”.
1) Replacing a module
 Switch off the DC power supply
 Disconnect the trip outputs
 Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs
 Unscrew the module connector
 Unplug the connector from the target module.

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance
 Unscrew the module.
 Pull out the module
 Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.
 After replacing the MON module, input the application-specific setting values again.
2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)
 Open the device front panel
 Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.
 Detach the HMI module from the device
 Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.
13.4 Cleaning
Before cleaning the device, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean
the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.
13.5 Storage
The spare device or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40°C to +70°C, but the temperature of from 0°C
to +40°C is recommended for long-term storage.

Date: 2013-12-13
13 Maintenance

Date: 2013-12-13
Table of Contents
14 Decommissioning and Disposal ................................................. 14-a
14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-1
14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-1

Date: 2013-12-13

Date: 2013-12-13
14.1 Decommissioning
DANGER!
Switch OFF the circuit breaker for primary CTs and VTs BEFORE disconnecting the
cables of AI module.
WARNING!
Switch OFF the external miniature circuit breaker of device power supply BEFORE
disconnecting the power supply cable connected to the PWR module.
WARNING!
KEEP an adequate safety distance to live parts of the power substation.
1. Switching off
To switch off this device, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.
2. Disconnecting cables
Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.
3. Dismantling
The device rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
14.2 Disposal
NOTICE!
Strictly observe all local and national laws and regulations when disposing the device.

Date: 2013-12-13

Date: 2013-12-13

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.
Manual version and modification history records
Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
R1.00 R1.00 2012-12-25 Form the original manual.
Symbol corresponding relationship are added in the end of the
preface;
Operation characteristic of DPFC percentage restraint differential
R1.00 R1.01 R1.00 2013-02-06
element in Figure 3.3-3 is modified;
“Logic Links State” submenu are added for the menu “Status”;
MMS communication network deployment are modified.
R1.01 R1.02 R1.00 2013-07-04 Mechnical dimension of the devices are changed
Four restraint coefficients for steady-state busbar differential
protection are added;
R1.02 R1.03 R1.00 2013-09-25
Three logic settings [En_AutoRecov_AlmH_CTS],
[En_AutoRecov_AlmL_CTS] and [87B.En_CTS_Blk] are added.
Section 3.3 are added and Section 3.4 are modified;
Dead zone fault protection settings are added;
R1.03 R2.00 R1.00 2013-12-13 Many description of several protective functions are modified;
One device setting [En_Volt_BB] is added;
Many communication settings are added.
All the contents related to digital substation are modified;
R2.00 R2.10 R1.00 2014-07-02 Some contents of Chapter 3 are modified;
Almost all the figures in Chapter 9 are changed.
The basic information configuration item “Inverted-logic for
R2.10 R2.11 R1.00 2014-09-20
enabled binary inputs” is deleted
Phase-segregated CT circuit failure alarm signals are added;
Disconnector position configuration settings are added;
R2.11 R2.12 R1.10 2015-03-07
DNP3.0 protocol related configuration and communication
settings are added.
R2.12 R2.13 R1.10 2015-07-13 The MON module NR1101D is replaced by NR1101F.

Date: 2015-07-13

Date: 2015-07-13

PCS-915IC X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.13-Đã M Khóa

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PCS-915IC X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X R2.13-Đã M Khóa

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PCS-915IC

Centralized Busbar Relay

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

1.2 Health and Safety

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

 Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

1.3 Instructions and Warnings

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay i

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

ii PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

 Printed circuit board

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing

Copyright © 2015 NR. All rights reserved.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Tel: +86-25-87178888

PN: ZL_PCS-915IC_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: R2.13

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay iii

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

5 Measurement and Recording

8 Human Machine Interface

iv PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

15 Manual Version History

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

The following symbols are used in drawings:

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting

EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay v

OTH Input of other signal

XXX Output signal

IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

vi PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-a

1-b PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay

PCS-915IC provides the following functions

 Busbar differential protection (87B)

 Steady-state percentage restraint differential protection

 DPFC percentage restraint differential protection

 Bus coupler protection

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

PCS-915IC Centralized Busbar Relay 1-1

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Switch-onto-fault protection (50SOTF)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

 Breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Dead zone fault protection (50DZ)

 Pole disagreement protection (62PD)

 Overcurrent protection (50/51)

DPFC is the abbreviation of “deviation of power frequency component”. When a fault

 Dynamic busbar replica

 Disconnector position alarm

1. Protection and Control

 Parallel calculation of double DSP system

 Independent fault detector element

 Accurate measurement which can prevent any undesired trip

 High sensitive percentage restraint differential protection

 Matching to different CT ratios